4-549-307-11(1)

Solid-State Memory
Camcorder
PXW-X200

Operating Instructions
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly
and retain it for future reference.

© 2014 Sony Corporation

 Table of Contents

Overview
Part Identification ..................................................................... 7
Camcorder ...................................................................... 7
IR Remote Commander (Supplied) .............................. 12
On-Screen Indications ............................................................ 13
Direct Menu Operation ................................................ 15

Preparations
Power Supply ........................................................................... 16
Using a Battery Pack .................................................... 16
Using AC Power (DC IN Power) ................................. 17
Turning the Power On/Off ........................................... 17
Setting the Clock ..................................................................... 18
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder ....................... 18
Adjusting the LCD Monitor ......................................... 18
Adjusting the Viewfinder ............................................. 18
Using the IR Remote Commander ........................................ 19
Using SxS Memory Cards ...................................................... 20
About SxS Memory Cards ........................................... 20
Inserting/Removing an SxS Memory Card .................. 21
Switching Between SxS Memory Cards ...................... 21
Formatting an SxS Memory Card ................................ 21
Checking the Remaining Time Available for
Recording ............................................................... 22
Restoring an SxS Memory Card .................................. 22
Using Other Media .................................................................. 23
XQD Memory Cards .................................................... 23
SD Cards ...................................................................... 23
USB Flash Drives ......................................................... 24

2 Table of Contents
Recording
Basic Operation Procedure .................................................... 26
Changing Basic Settings ......................................................... 28
Video Formats .............................................................. 28
ND Filter ...................................................................... 29
White Balance .............................................................. 29
Markers/Zebra Patterns ................................................ 30
Gain .............................................................................. 30
Electronic Shutter ......................................................... 31
Iris ................................................................................ 31
Zoom ............................................................................ 32
Focus ............................................................................ 32
Steady Shot ................................................................... 33
Flickers ......................................................................... 33
Time Data ..................................................................... 34
Recording Audio Signals ........................................................ 34
Using the Built-in Stereo Microphones ........................ 34
Using External Inputs ................................................... 34
Using an External Microphone .................................... 34
Adjusting the Audio Recording Levels ........................ 35
Monitoring the Audio ................................................... 35
Useful Functions ...................................................................... 36
Color Bars/Reference Tone .......................................... 36
Shot Marks ................................................................... 36
OK/NG/KP Flags (UDF and exFAT) .......................... 36
OK Mark (FAT HD Mode Only) ................................. 36
Rec Review .................................................................. 37
Assignable Buttons ....................................................... 37
Interval Recording ........................................................ 37
Frame Recording .......................................................... 38
Clip Continuous Recording (UDF and exFAT) ........... 39
Picture Cache Recording: Retroactively Record .......... 39
Slow & Quick Motion .................................................. 40
Freeze Mix: Image Alignment ..................................... 41
Automatic Adjustment of Flange Focal Length ........... 41
Picture Profiles ............................................................. 42
Deleting Clips ............................................................... 50
Storing/Retrieving the Setting Data ............................. 50
Planning Metadata ........................................................ 51
Proxy Recording ..................................................................... 54
Usable SD Cards .......................................................... 54
Formatting an SD Card ................................................ 54
Checking the Remaining Time ..................................... 54
Performing Proxy Recording ....................................... 54
Changing the Proxy Recording Setting ........................ 55

Table of Contents 3
 About the Recorded File .............................................. 55
Storage Destination of the Recorded File .................... 55
About the File Name .................................................... 55
Connecting to Other Device via Wireless LAN .................... 55
Attaching the IFU-WLM3 ............................................ 56
Connecting with the Wireless LAN Access Point
Mode ...................................................................... 56
Connecting with the Wireless LAN Station Mode ...... 58
Uploading a File ...................................................................... 59
Preparations .................................................................. 59
Selecting the File and Uploading ................................. 59
Using the Wi-Fi Remote Commander .......................... 61
About the Web Menu ............................................................. 62
Format Settings ............................................................ 63
Wireless LAN Settings (Station Settings) .................... 64
Upload Settings ............................................................ 65
Checking the File Transferring (Job List) .................... 66
Error/Warning Indicator ............................................... 67

Playback
Thumbnail Screens ................................................................. 68
Configuration of the Thumbnail Screen ....................... 68
Changing the Type of Thumbnail Screen .................... 69
Playing Clips ............................................................................ 70
Playing the Selected and Subsequent Clips in
Sequence ................................................................ 70
Monitoring Audio ......................................................... 71
Cueing Up .................................................................... 71
Adding Shot Marks During Playback
(UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD Mode) ...................... 71
Clip Operations ....................................................................... 71
Clip Operation Menus .................................................. 71
Basic Operations of the Clip Operation Menus ........... 72
Displaying the Detailed Information of a Clip ............. 73
Adding/Deleting a Flag (UDF and exFAT) ................. 74
Adding/Deleting the OK Mark
(FAT HD Mode Only) ........................................... 74
Copying Clips ............................................................... 74
Deleting Clips ............................................................... 75
Displaying the EXPAND CLIP Screen ........................ 75
Displaying the SHOT MARK Screen
(UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD Mode) ...................... 76
Adding/Deleting Shot Marks
(UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD Mode) ...................... 77

4 Table of Contents
 Changing the Index Frame
(UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD Mode) ...................... 77
Dividing a Clip (FAT HD Mode Only) ........................ 77
Showing the Status Screens .................................................... 78
Camera Status Screen ................................................... 78
Audio Status Screen ..................................................... 79
Video Status Screen ..................................................... 79
Button/Remote Status Screen ....................................... 80
Battery/Media Status Screen ........................................ 80

Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

Overview of the Setup Menus ................................................ 81
Setup Menu Layers ...................................................... 81
Basic Menu Operations .......................................................... 82
Setup Menu List ...................................................................... 84
CAMERA SET Menu .................................................. 84
AUDIO SET Menu ...................................................... 91
VIDEO SET Menu ....................................................... 93
LCD/VF SET Menu ..................................................... 96
TC/UB SET Menu ........................................................ 99
OTHERS Menu .......................................................... 101

Connecting External Devices

Connecting External Monitors and Recording
Devices ............................................................................. 111
Operating Clips With a Computer ...................................... 112
Connecting via i.LINK (FAT only) ..................................... 114
Recording the Camcorder Picture on an External
Device .................................................................. 114
Nonlinear Editing ....................................................... 115
Recording External Input Signals .............................. 115
External Synchronization ..................................................... 116

Table of Contents 5
 Appendices
Important Notes on Operation ............................................ 119
Video Format (Format) ........................................................ 122
UDF HD Mode ........................................................... 122
UDF SD Mode ........................................................... 122
exFAT HD Mode ....................................................... 123
exFAT SD Mode ........................................................ 123
FAT HD Mode ........................................................... 124
FAT SD Mode ............................................................ 124
Formats and Limitations of Outputs .................................. 125
Video Formats and Output Signals ............................ 125
Limitations of Inputs/Outputs .................................... 133
Video Format and the Recording Function ................ 134
Backup Battery Replacement .............................................. 138
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 139
Power .......................................................................... 139
Recording/Playback ................................................... 139
External Devices ........................................................ 140
When Making a Wireless LAN Connection .............. 140
Error/Warning Indications .................................................. 141
Error Indications ......................................................... 141
Warning Indications ................................................... 141
Licenses .................................................................................. 144
MPEG-4 AVC Patent Portfolio License .................... 144
MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio License ................... 144
Bitmap Fonts .............................................................. 144
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ..................... 144
About OpenSSL ......................................................... 149
Specifications ......................................................................... 151
General ....................................................................... 151
Lens ............................................................................ 154
Camera Section .......................................................... 155
Inputs/Outputs ............................................................ 155
Monitoring .................................................................. 156
Built-in Microphone ................................................... 156
Media .......................................................................... 156
Supplied Accessories ................................................. 156
Optional Accessories .................................................. 157
Index ....................................................................................... 158

6 Table of Contents
 Overview

Overview
Part Identification
For functions and usage, see the pages in parentheses.

Camcorder

Operation panel on the

handle (page 9)

1 2 3 45

9 Rear connector
Lens control
8 panel (page 11)
block (page 10)
6
Side operation panel
(page 10) 7
Card slot block (page 11)

1. Lens hood 2. Headphone connector (stereo mini jack)

Attach (page 35)
Insert the hood by aligning the mark on the
3. Rear remote sensor
camcorder and hood then turn the hood
clockwise (in the opposite direction of arrow 2 4. Power switch (page 17)
in the illustration below), with the front of the 5. BATT RELEASE button (page 16)
camcorder facing forward, until the hood is
6. DC IN connector (page 17)
locked.
Detach 7. Battery pack receptacle (page 16)
1 Press the PUSH (lens food removing) button, 8. WHITE BAL (automatic white balance
2 turn the hood in the direction of the arrow, 3 adjustment) button (page 30)
then withdraw it.
9. Lens cap open/close lever (page 26)

PUSH (lens hood

removing) button

Part Identification 7
 1 2 3 11 4 5 678
Overview

12
11

13

Controls on the grip

(page 12) 10 9

1. Viewfinder (page 18) 10. AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors (XLR)

How to attach the EVF large eyecup and input selection (LINE/MIC/
Stretch the EVF large eyecup for attaching to
MIC+48V) switches (page 34)
the viewfinder and insert it aligning with the 11. Hooks for the shoulder strap
horizontal groove of the eyecup. Attach the supplied shoulder strap as shown
below.

4
3
2
EVF large eyecup
(supplied)
2. Rear accessory shoe (page 9) 1
3. External microphone holder (page 34) 12. Eyepiece focusing knob (page 19)
4. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) monitor 13. Microphone cable holder (page 34)
(page 18)
5. Front accessory shoe
The cover is attached. The front accessory
shoe will be compatible with the multi
interface function in future upgrades.
6. Built-in stereo microphone (page 34)
7. REC/TALLY lamp
8. Front IR remote control receptor
9. Built-in speaker (page 71)

8 Part Identification
To mount the accessory shoe
Mount the accessory shoe on the accessory shoe
Operation panel on the handle

Overview
mount as illustrated.
1 10
Accessory shoe plate 2 11
3
4 12
5 13
6 14
7 15
Accessory shoe
8
16
17
Accessory shoe
9 18

Accessory shoe plate

1. PLAY/PAUSE button (page 70)
1. Lift the edge of the accessory shoe plate and 2. F REV (fast reverse) button (page 71)
pull it in the direction opposite to that of the
3. THUMBNAIL button (page 68)
arrow on the accessory shoe plate and
remove it from the accessory shoe. 4. STOP/CAM button (page 68)
2. Place the accessory shoe so its protrusions 5. STATUS (status display on/off) button
match recesses of the accessory shoe mount, (page 78)
then fix it to the mount with four screws. 6. PREV (previous) button
3. Insert the accessory shoe plate in the 7. Up/down/left/right buttons, SEL/SET
direction of the arrow on the plate surface (select/set) button (page 82)
until the end of the plate engages the end of 8. MENU (menu display on/off) button (page
the shoe. 82)
To remove the accessory shoe 9. On-handle ZOOM button (page 32)
Remove the shoe plate in the same way as step 1
of “To mount the accessory shoe.” Loosen the 4
10. F FWD (fast forward) button (page 71)
screws and remove the accessory shoe from the 11. LCD BRIGHT (LCD brightness
accessory shoe mount. adjustment) button (page 18)
12. NEXT (clip directional jump) button
(page 71)
13. DISPLAY button (page 13)
14. VOLUME (monitor volume) buttons
(page 35)
15. CANCEL button
16. DURATION/TC/U-BIT (time data
selection) button (page 34)
17. REC START/STOP button (page 27)
18. REC HOLD lever (page 27)

Part Identification 9
 Lens control block Side operation panel
Overview

1 2 3 4 5 6

1. Focus ring (page 32)

2. Zoom ring (page 32) 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
3. STEADY SHOT button (page 33) 1. ASSIGN (assignable) 1/2/3/4 buttons (page
4. IRIS switch (page 31) 37)
“Zebra” is set to ASSIGN 1 and “Peaking” is
5. Iris ring (page 31)
set to ASSIGN 2 by default.
6. ND FILTER select switch (page 29)
2. FULL AUTO button and indicator (page
7. MACRO switch (page 33) 26)
8. FOCUS switch (page 32) 3. PICTURE PROFILE button (page 42)
9. PUSH AUTO (momentary auto focus) 4. AUDIO IN (audio input selection)
button (page 33) switches (page 34)
5. AUDIO SELECT (audio level control
mode selection) switches (page 35)
6. AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2 knobs (page
35)
7. SHUTTER switch (page 31)
8. GAIN switch (page 30)
9. WHITE BAL (white balance memory)
switch (page 29)
10. ASSIGN (assignable) 5 button (page 37)
11. MENU (menu display on/off) button (page
82)
12. SEL/SET dial (jog dial) (page 82)
It functions accordingly when you turn it up or
down, or you push it horizontally.
It is called the “jog dial” in the subsequent
operating instructions.
13. CANCEL button

10 Part Identification
Card slot block Rear connector panel

Overview
The SxS memory card slots and EJECT buttons
are located behind the cover. 1
5
Open the cover

6
1 7
2 8
3 9
4 10
2 11
12

1. External device connector (page 24, 56)

3 2. PC connector (page 112)
3. i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector (4-pin, S400
conforming to IEEE1394) (page 112)
4. A/V OUT (audio/video multi output)
4 connector (page 112)
5. N mark
• Hold a NFC-compatible smartphone near
this mark when making wireless
connection between the camcorder and
smartphone. For details, refer to the
1. ACCESS lamps (page 21) operating instructions of the smartphone.
2. SxS memory card slots (page 21) • NFC (Near Field Communication) is the
3. EJECT (SxS memory card eject) buttons international standard for the short range
(page 21) radio communication technique.
4. SLOT SELECT (SxS memory card select) 6. HDMI OUT connector (page 111)
button (page 21) 7. SD card ACCESS lamp
Lights in red while accessing the loaded SD
card.
8. SD card slot for proxy recording (page 54)
9. SDI OUT (serial digital output) connector
(BNC type) (page 111)
10. TC IN (timecode input)/TC OUT
(timecode output) connector (BNC type)
(page 117)
11. IN/OUT (input/output change) switch
(page 118)
Set this to IN to select TC IN and GENLOCK
IN, and set this to OUT to select TC OUT and
VIDEO OUT.
12. GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT (analog
video output) connector (BNC type) (page
111, 117)

Part Identification 11
 may lead to the physical injury of the camera
Controls on the grip operator.
Overview

3. Backup battery holder (page 138)

1
2
IR Remote Commander (Supplied)
3

1. REC REVIEW button (page 27)

2. Power zoom lever (page 32)
3. FOCUS MAG button (page 32)
4. LENS REMOTE (lens remote controller)
connector (page 32)
5. REC START (start/stop recording) 1. DATA CODE button
button (page 27) This button does not work on the camcorder.
Note 2. TC RESET (timecode reset) button
There is a GPS mark on the camcorder. The GPS 3. SCAN/SLOW (reverse high speed
function will be compatible in future upgrades. playback/high speed playback) buttons
4. . > (PREV/NEXT(clip reverse/
Bottom forward direction jump)) buttons
5. PLAY button
6. STOP button
7. DISPLAY button
8. Transmitter
9. START/STOP (recording start/stop)
button
10. Power zoom lever
11. PAUSE button
12. MODE button
1 2 3 This button does not work on the camcorder.
13. b/B/v/V/ENTER buttons
1. ZOOM (zoom mode switching) switch
(page 32)
2. Tripod receptacles
Note
Check that the size of the hole matches the screw of
the tripod. If they do not match, the camcorder
cannot be attached to the tripod securely, and this

12 Part Identification
 On-Screen Indications

Overview
While recording (or standing by to record), pressing the DISPLAY button displays the statuses and
settings of this unit on the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen.
Remarks
[M]: The indication of the items named with this suffix can be independently turned on/off with “Display
On/Off” of the LCD/VF SET menu (page 97).
[A]: The indication of items named with this suffix can be turned on/off using the assignable buttons to
which the corresponding on/off functions have been assigned (page 37).
[D]: The settings of the items named with this suffix can be changed using the Direct menu on the screen
(page 15).

SD

1. Battery remaining/DC IN voltage S&Q STBY Standby for Slow & Quick
indication [M] (page 16) Motion recording
2. i.LINK status indication (page 114) zINT REC Interval Recording in progress
Only when an external device is connected to INT STBY Standby for Interval
the i.LINK connector, the status of the device is Recording
displayed. zFRM REC Frame Recording in progress
FRM STBY Standby for Frame Recording
3. Special recording/operation status
zCACHE z in green: Standby for
indication Picture Cache Recording
zREC Recording in progress z in red: Picture Cache
STBY Standby for recording Recording in progress
CONT Standby for recording
When using Clip Continuous
4. Media status indication
Recording, indicates that a Memory card in slot A is active.
clip is being continued.
“CONT” flashing: When Memory card in slot B is active.
using Clip Continuous
Recording, indicates that there 5. Time data indication [M] (page 34)
is no continuing clip. 6. Media remaining indication [M] (page 22)
zS&Q REC Slow & Quick Motion
7. Zoom position indication [M] (page 32)
recording in progress

On-Screen Indications 13
 8. Synchronous recording indication [M] 14. White balance mode and color
(page 111) temperature indications [M][D] (page 29)
Overview

“Rec2” appears when recording while “SDI 15. Picture profile indication [M][D] (page 42)
Rec Control” of the VIDEO SET menu is set
to “HD SDI Remote I/F.”
16. Depth-of-Field bar indication [M][A]
“Rec2-P” appears when recording 17. Iris position indication [M][D] (page 31)
synchronously while “Proxy” of the 18. Gain indication [M][D] (page 30)
CAMERA SET menu is set to “On.”
19. Shutter mode/shutter speed indication
9. Brightness level indication [M][A] [M][D] (page 31)
10. ND FILTER position [M] 20. Audio level meters [M]
Displays the selected ND filter number (page
29).
21. Histogram indication [M][A]
11. TLCS mode indication [M][D] (page 89) 22. Video level cautioning indication [M]
/Recommended ND filter number
Backlight mode indication/Clip uploading status
indication
STD Standard mode The clip uploading status indication is displayed
when connected via wireless LAN. The number
Spotlight mode of remaining clips for uploading and uploading
rate are displayed.
12. Steady Shot indication [M][D] (page 33)
23. SD card remaining space indication
13. Focus mode indication [M] ([D] only in MF The remaining space of the SD card is displayed
mode) (page 32) while the SD card is inserted in the card slot of
the camcorder (page 54).
24. Wi-Fi status indication
The Wi-Fi settings and reception status are displayed as icons.
Conditions Icon
OTHERS menu > OTHERS menu > Wi-Fi operating
“Network” > “Network” > status
“Wi-Fi&Proxy/ “Wi-Fi Func.
USB” Mode”
“Off” or “USB A” – – No display
“Wi-Fi&Proxy” “Off” – No display
“Access Point” Preparing Flashing
Connecting AP
Cannot be connected 1) No display
“Station” Preparing Flashing
Connecting Intensity 1 Intensity 2
Intensity 3 Intensity 4
The icon changes depending on the
radio wave intensity.
Disconnecting No radio wave
Cannot be connected 1) No display
1) When the USB wireless LAN module is not connected, or the SSID is not set.

14 On-Screen Indications
25. Special recording mode indication [M] ([D]
only in Slow & Quick Motion Standby) Direct Menu Operation

Overview
Frame Rec Frame Rec mode
The settings of the items named with a suffix [D]
Interval Rec Interval Rec mode
can be changed using the Direct menu on the
S&Q Motion Slow & Quick Motion mode
screen.
xx/xx fps
Select “All,” “Part,” or “Off” for Direct Menu
26. Video format indication [M] (page 28) using “Direct Menu” (page 104) of the OTHERS
27. Clip name indication [M] (page 27) menu.
Note
When the indicator of the FULL AUTO button is lit, the
Direct Menu operation is disabled for the functions that
are forcibly set to the automatic mode in Full Auto mode
(page 26).

1 When the camcorder’s status or settings

are displayed on the screen, press the
SEL/SET button (page 9) or the jog dial
(page 10).
If “Direct Menu” is set to “All” or “Part,” the
cursor is displayed on one of the items for
which the Direct menu operation is
permitted.

2 Press the up/down/left/right buttons

(page 9) or rotate the jog dial to set the
cursor to the item to be operated, then
press the SEL/SET button or the jog
dial.
The Direct menu of the selected items appears.

3 Press the up/down/left/right buttons or

rotate the jog dial to select a setting,
then press the SEL/SET button or the
jog dial.
The menu disappears, and the new setting is
displayed.

On-Screen Indications 15
 Preparations
Power Supply
You can use a battery pack or AC power via an Note
AC adaptor. The AC adaptor cannot be connected to the camcorder
For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and
Preparations

while the battery pack is inserted.

AC adaptor listed below:
Lithium-ion Battery Pack Using a Battery Pack
BP-U30
BP-U60 Fully insert the battery pack into the battery pack
BP-U60T receptacle (page 7), then slide it down to lock it.
BP-U90 To remove the battery pack, press and hold the
Battery Charger/AC Adaptor BATT RELEASE button (page 7), slide the
BC-U1 battery pack upward to unlock it, then pull it out.
BC-U2 Notes
• Before use, charge the battery pack with the supplied
The life expectancy of the AC adapter and the BC-U1 or BC-U2 Battery Charger.
electrolytic capacitor is about 5 years under • A warm battery pack immediately after use may not be
normal operating temperatures and normal usage able to be fully recharged.
(8 hours per day; 25 days per month). If usage • The high-capacity BP-U90 Battery Pack is large, and
protrudes from the camcorder when attached. When
exceeds the above normal usage frequency, the
using the camcorder with the BP-U90 attached for
life expectancy may be reduced correspondingly. extended recording periods, Sony recommends
attaching the camcorder to a tripod for convenience.
The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for
battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable Checking battery charge remaining
part.
When recording or playback is in progress on the
Power may not be supplied to the unit properly if
battery pack, an icon to show the current battery
the pins of the battery terminal are bent or
charge level and usage time remaining are
deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they
displayed on the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen
become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use.
(page 13).
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep
the unit working properly and to prolong its Icon Remaining
usable lifetime. 100% to 91%
Contact a Sony service or sales representative for
90% to 71%
more information about inspections.
70% to 51%

WARNING 50% to 31%

Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat 30% to 11%

such as sunshine, fire or the like. 10% to 0%

The camcorder indicates the remaining usage

CAUTION time in minutes by calculating the available time
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly with the battery pack if operation is continued at
replaced. Replace only with the same or the current rate of power consumption.
equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey
the law in the relative area or country.

16 Power Supply
If the battery charge remaining becomes Turning the Power On/Off
low
To turn the power on, set the power switch (page
If the battery charge remaining decreases to a
7) to the ON position (the ? position). To turn the
certain level during operation (Low BATT
power off, set the power switch to the OFF
status), a low-battery message, flashing of the
position (the 1 position).
tally lamps, and a beep sound will warn you.
If the remaining further decreases to a level at Notes

Preparations
which operation cannot be continued (BATT • This camcorder uses a little standby power even when
Empty status), a battery-empty message appears. the power switch is set to OFF. Remove the battery
Replace the battery pack with one that is fully pack if the camcorder will not be used for a prolonged
charged. period.
• When removing the battery pack or the DC IN power,
To change the message levels be sure to first set the power switch to the OFF
The Low BATT level is set to 10% of full charge, position. Removing the battery pack or the DC IN
power while the camcorder is on may cause damage to
and the BATT Empty level is set to 3% of full the camcorder or the SxS memory card.
charge at the factory. These settings can be
changed with “Battery Alarm” (page 104) of the
OTHERS menu.

Using AC Power (DC IN Power)

Connection example: when connecting BC-U1

3 DC
OU
T
CH
ARG
E
0%
BATTE 80
BC-
U1 RY CH 100
ARG
ER

BC-U1

1 Connect the DC power output cable of

the BC-U1 to the DC IN connector of
the camcorder.

2 Connect the power cord of the BC-U1 to

an AC power source.

3 Set the mode switch of the BC-U1 to the

DC OUT position.

Power Supply 17
 Setting the Clock Adjusting the LCD
Monitor and Viewfinder
When you turn the camcorder on for the first time
after purchasing or replacing the backup battery
(page 138), the Initial Setting display appears on
the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen.
Adjusting the LCD Monitor
Preparations

Set the date and time of the built-in clock, using

The LCD monitor turns on when it is opened and
this display.
turns off when it is returned to the park position.
Time Zone
The value shows the time difference from UTC Adjusting the angle
(Coordinated Universal Time).
It can be rotated as much as 90 degrees in the
Change the setting if needed.
direction facing the subject and as much as 180
degrees in the opposite direction.
Setting the time and date When you rotate it 90 degrees toward the subject,
Press the up/down/left/right buttons (page 9) or the image on the monitor becomes upside down,
turn the jog dial (page 10) to move the cursor, indicating the mirror image of the subject. The
then press the SEL/SET button or the jog dial to display direction of the textual information is
set each menu item. When you press the SEL/ converted to the readable direction.
SET button or the jog dial when the cursor is on
“Finish,” the Initial Setting display disappears Adjusting the backlight
and the clock setting is completed.
Press the LCD BRIGHT button (page 9) to adjust
the brightness of the backlight.
After the Initial Setting display disappears, “Time
Zone” (page 101) and “Clock Set” (page 101) of
the OTHERS menu can be used to set “Time Adjusting the color, contrast, and
Zone” and “Date/Time.” brightness
Notes These adjustments can be made using “LCD”
• If the clock setting is cleared because of exhaustion of
(page 96) of the LCD/VF SET menu. These
the backup battery while no operation power was being adjustments of the LCD monitor have no effect on
supplied (no battery pack and no DC IN connection), pictures being recorded.
the Initial Setting display will be displayed when you
turn the camcorder on at the next opportunity.
• While the Initial Setting display is shown, no other Adjusting the Viewfinder
operation except turning the power off is permitted
until you finish the setting for this display.
If the picture on the LCD monitor is hard to view
under bright ambient light, you can use the
viewfinder to check the picture.

Caution
Do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece of
the viewfinder facing the sun. Direct sunlight can
enter through the eyepiece, be focused in the
viewfinder, and cause fire.

Hereafter the viewfinder is referred to as “EVF”

(abbreviation of Electronic Viewfinder).

18 Setting the Clock / Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder

Turning the EVF on/off
With the factory setting, the EVF is turned on Using the IR Remote
when the LCD monitor is in its park position or is
rotated to face the subject.
Commander
You can change the setting so that the EVF is
always on regardless of the status in the LCD
Before use
monitor, using “EVF” (page 96) of the LCD/VF

Preparations
SET menu. Change the “Power” setting from Before you use the supplied IR Remote
“Auto” to “On.” Commander for the first time, pull out the
insulation sheet from the battery holder.
Adjusting the focus in the EVF Insulation sheet
The eyepiece focusing (diopter compensation)
knob (page 8) enables adjustment to match the
eyesight of the operator, who can then view the
image clearly through the eyepiece.
A CR2025 lithium battery is set in the holder at
Adjusting the backlight the factory.

The brightness of the backlight for the EVF can

Using the IR Remote Commander
be switched between High and Low.
Set “Backlight” in “EVF” (page 96) of the LCD/ For controlling the camcorder from the IR
VF SET menu. Remote Commander, activate the remote control
function of the camcorder after turning the power
Switching between color and on.
Activating/deactivating the remote control
monochrome modes
function can be achieved using the Setup menu.
For the EVF screen, color or monochrome display
To activate using the menu
can be selected.
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to
Set “Mode” in “EVF” (page 96) of the LCD/VF
Menu mode, then set “IR Remote” (page 104) of
SET menu.
the System menu to “On.”
Select “B&W” if checking the subject and
focusing are easier on the monochrome display. To activate using the assignable button
If you assign “EVF Mode” to one of the If you assign “IR Remote” to one of the
assignable buttons (page 37), you can switch assignable buttons (page 37), you can switch
between color and monochrome by pressing the between activating and deactivating the remote
button. control function by pressing the button.
Notes
Adjusting the contrast and brightness
• Aim the IR Remote Commander towards the remote
Use “EVF” (page 96) of the LCD/VF SET menu sensor to operate your camcorder.
to make adjustments. Adjusting the brightness • Point the remote sensor away from strong light sources
such as direct sunlight or overhead lighting. Otherwise,
and other items has no effect on pictures being the IR Remote Commander may not function properly.
recorded. • When you are operating with the IR Remote
Commander supplied with your camcorder, your video
device may also operate. In that case, select a
commander mode other than DVD2 for your video
device, or cover the sensor of your video device with
black paper.
• The remote control function is deactivated
automatically when the camcorder is turned off to
prevent a malfunction. To use the remote control
function, activate it when the camcorder is turned on.

Using the IR Remote Commander 19

 Replacing the battery in the IR Remote
Commander Using SxS Memory
Use a commercially available CR2025 lithium Cards
battery. Do not use any battery other than a
CR2025.
This camcorder records audio and video on SxS
1. While pressing on the tab, inset your memory cards (optional) inserted in the card slots.
Preparations

fingernail into the slit to pull out the battery

case.
2. Place a new battery with the + side facing up.
About SxS Memory Cards
3. Insert the battery case back into the IR
Remote Commander until it clicks. Usable SxS memory cards
Use the following Sony-made SxS memory cards.
Operations are not guaranteed with memory cards
other than the following cards.
Tab
SxS PRO+ series
SxS PRO series
WARNING SxS-1 series
• Battery may explode if mistreated.
Do not recharge, disassemble, or dispose of in These cards comply with the ExpressCard
fire. standard.
• Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat For details on using SxS memory cards and usage-
such as sunshine, fire or the like. related precautions, refer to the instruction manual
for the SxS memory card.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly SxS, SxS PRO and SxS-1 are trademarks of Sony
replaced. Replace only with the same or Corporation.
equivalent type recommended by the The ExpressCard word mark and logo are owned
manufacturer. by Personal Computer Memory Card
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey International Association (PCMCIA) and are
the law in the relative area or country. licensed to Sony Corporation. All other
trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.

20 Using SxS Memory Cards

Inserting/Removing an SxS Switching Between SxS Memory
Memory Card Cards
When SxS memory cards are loaded in both card
Inserting an SxS memory card slots A and B, press the SLOT SELECT button
(page 11) to select the card you wish to use.
1 Open the cover of the card slot block If a card becomes full during recording, switching

Preparations
(page 11). to the other card is automatically executed.

2 Insert the SxS memory card into the slot Note

with the SxS label facing right. The SLOT SELECT button is disabled while playback is
in progress. Switching is not executed even if you press
The ACCESS lamp (page 11) lights in red
the button. The button is enabled while the thumbnail
then changes to green once the memory card screen is displayed (page 68).
is ready for use.

3 Close the cover. Formatting an SxS Memory Card

Status indications by the ACCESS lamps For an SxS memory card that is not formatted or
Card slots A and B are accompanied by the that was formatted with another system, the
respective ACCESS lamps to indicate their message “Unsupported File System” is displayed
statuses. on the LCD monitor/EVF screen.
Format the card as instructed in “To execute
Lamp Slot statuses
formatting” below.
Lights in Accessing the loaded SxS memory card
red (writing/reading data)
Lights in Standby (ready for recording or To execute formatting
green playback using the loaded SxS memory
card)
Using “Format Media” (page 107) of the
Off • No SxS memory card is loaded. OTHERS menu, specify “Media(A)” (slot
• The loaded card is invalid. A) or “Media(B)” (slot B) then select
• An SxS memory card is loaded, but “Execute.” On a confirmation message,
another slot is active. select “Execute” again.
The in-progress message and status bar (%) are
displayed, and the ACCESS lamp lights in red.
Removing an SxS memory card
When formatting is completed, the completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
1 Open the cover of the card slot block,
press the EJECT button (page 11), then Recording/playback during formatting
pull the button out. You can perform recording or playback using the
SxS memory card in the other card slot while
2 Press the EJECT button again to formatting is in progress.
remove the card. If formatting fails
Note A write-protected SxS memory card or memory
card that cannot be used with this camcorder will
Data are not guaranteed if the power is turned off or a
memory card is removed while the card is being
not be formatted.
accessed. All data on the card may be destroyed. Be sure As a warning message is displayed, replace the
that the ACCESS lamps are lit in green or off when you card with an appropriate SxS memory card, as per
turn off the power or remove memory cards. the instructions in the message.

Using SxS Memory Cards 21

 Notes To restore a card
• Use the format function of this camcorder to format
SxS memory cards for use on this camcorder. The Select “Execute” by pressing the up/down/
formats of cards formatted on other devices are not left/right buttons or turning the jog dial,
recognized as valid formats, making it necessary to
format them again on this camcorder. then push the SEL/SET button or the jog
• All the data, including recorded pictures and setup dial.
files, are erased when a memory card is formatted.
During restoration, the in-progress message and
Preparations

status bar (%) are displayed, and the ACCESS

Checking the Remaining Time lamp is lit in red.
When restoration is completed, the completion
Available for Recording message is displayed for three seconds.
While recording (or standing by to record), you If restoration fails
can check the time remaining for the SxS memory • A write-protected SxS memory card or one on
cards loaded in the card slots on the LCD which an error occurred cannot be restored. For
monitor/EVF screen (page 13). such a card, a warning message is displayed.
The available time for recording with the current Release the write protection or replace the card,
video format (recording bit rate) is calculated as per the instructions in the message.
according to the remaining space of each card and • An SxS memory card on which an error
displayed in time units of minutes. occurred may become usable again through
The remaining can also be checked in a meter repeated formatting.
format on the Battery/Media status screen (page • In some cases, only parts of clips cannot be
80). restored. Playback of the restored clips becomes
possible again.
Note
• The following operation may restore an SxS
A icon appears if the memory card is write- memory card for which the message “Could not
protected.
Restore Some Clips” is repeatedly displayed
each time you try the restoration process:
Replacing an SxS memory card
4 Copy necessary clips to another SxS memory
• If the available time on two cards in total card, using the copy function (page 74) of the
becomes less than 5 minutes, a message “Media camcorder or the dedicated application
Near Full,” flashing of the tally lamps, and a software (supplied) (page 113).
beep sound will warn you. Replace the cards
5 Format the problem SxS memory card, using
with those with sufficient space.
the format function of this camcorder.
• If you continue recording until the total
remaining time reaches zero, the message 6 Return the necessary clips to the SxS
changes to “Media Full,” and recording stops. memory card by copy operation.

Note Recording/playback during restoration

You can perform recording or playback using the
Approximately 600 clips can be recorded on one SxS
memory card at maximum. SxS memory card in the other card slot while
If the number of recorded clips reaches the limit, the restoration is in progress.
remaining time indication becomes “0,” and the message
“Media Full” is displayed. Note
For restoration of media recorded with this unit, be sure
to use this unit. Media recorded with a device other than
Restoring an SxS Memory Card this unit or with another unit of different version (even of
the same model) may not be restored using this unit.
If an error occurs with data in a memory card for
some reason, the card must be restored.
If an SxS memory card that needs to be restored
is loaded, a message that prompts you to execute
a restore operation is displayed on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen.

22 Using SxS Memory Cards

 A) or “Media(B)” (slot B), then select
“Execute.”
Using Other Media An in-progress message and status bar (%) are
displayed, and the ACCESS lamp lights in red.
Notes When formatting is completed, a completion
• Medias other than an SxS memory card cannot obtain message is displayed for three seconds.
the high reliability and durability equivalent to an SxS
Note
memory card for professional use.

Preparations
• Not all memory cards have been verified to function When formatting, all data in an XQD memory card—
with this camcorder. For compatible memory cards, including protected images—are erased and cannot be
contact your dealer. restored.
Connection between the camcorder and a PC
XQD Memory Cards To use an XQD memory card in which data have
been recorded with an XDCAM/XDCAM EX-
By using an optional QDA-EX1 Media Adaptor, series product, insert it into the slot of the
you can insert an XQD memory card into the SxS camcorder and connect between the PC and this
memory card slot and use it instead of an SxS camcorder using a USB cable.
memory card. To use media formatted with this camcorder in
Usable XQD memory cards the slots of other devices
XQD memory card S series Make a backup of the media, then format it using
XQD memory card N series the other device.
For details on using a QDA-EX1 Media Adaptor,
refer to the instruction manual supplied with it. SD Cards
Notes
Use of the optional MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor
• High-speed playback (page 9) may not be properly
achieved with an XQD memory card. permits you to insert an SD card to the SxS
• Slow Motion recording by the Slow & Quick Motion memory card slot and use it for recording and
recording function (page 40) cannot be made with an playback in the same way as with an SxS memory
XQD memory card. card.

Formatting Usable SD card

Class 10 SDHC card
When you use an XQD memory card with this
For details on use of the MEAD-SD02 Media
camcorder, formatting is required.
Adaptor, refer to the operating instructions supplied
An XQD memory card to be used with this
with the respective adaptor.
camcorder must be formatted using the format
function of this camcorder. Notes
It is also necessary to format an XQD memory • High-speed playback (page 9) may not be properly
card for use if a caution message is displayed achieved with an SD card.
when you mount the XQD memory card. • Slow Motion recording by the Slow & Quick Motion
recording function (page 40) cannot be made with an
For an XQD memory card that was formatted SD card.
with another system unsupported by this • SD cards do not support recording with UDF.
camcorder, the message “Unsupported File
System” is displayed on the LCD monitor/EVF Formatting
screen.
When you use an SD card with this camcorder,
Format the XQD memory card as instructed
formatting is required.
below.
An SD card to be used with this camcorder must
To execute formatting be formatted using the format function of this
Using “Format Media” (page 107) of the camcorder.
OTHERS menu, specify “Media(A)” (slot It is also necessary to format an SD card for use if
a caution message is displayed when you mount
the SD card.

Using Other Media 23

 For an SD card that was formatted with another When using the external device connector
system unsupported by this camcorder, the Set “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” in “Network” (page
message “Unsupported File System” is displayed 105) of the OTHERS menu to “USB A.”
on the LCD monitor/EVF screen.
Notes
Format the SD card as instructed below.
• During this setting, “XAVC-L50 1920×1080/59.94P,
To execute formatting 50P” and “XAVC-L35 1920×1080/59.94P, 50P”
cannot be selected for “Format” in “System” (page
Using “Format Media” (page 107) of the 105) of the OTHERS menu.
Preparations

OTHERS menu, specify “Media(A)” (slot • During this setting, 60fps and 50fps cannot be selected
A) or “Media(B)” (slot B), then select for “Frame Rate” in “S&Q Motion” when “Format” in
“System” of the OTHERS menu is set to “1920×1080/
“Execute.”
29.97P, 23.98P, 25P.”
An in-progress message and status bar (%) are
displayed, and the ACCESS lamp lights in red. Formatting (Initializing) USB Flash
When formatting is completed, a completion Drives
message is displayed for three seconds.
USB flash drives must be formatted with the
Note FAT32 file system.
When formatting, all data in an SD card including
protected images are erased and cannot be restored. Note
Connection between the camcorder and a PC Before using a drive, format it on this camcorder or a PC.
If a drive formatted on a PC cannot be used, format it on
To use an SD card in which data have been the camcorder.
recorded with an XDCAM/XDCAM EX-series
product, insert it into the slot of the camcorder 1 Connect a USB flash drive to the
and connect between the PC and this camcorder external device connector.
using a USB cable. If the drive is unformatted or has been
To use media formatted with this camcorder in formatted to other specifications, a message
the slots of other devices to confirm whether formatting is to be
Make a backup of the media, then format it using executed appears on the EVF screen.
the other device.
2 Using the up/down/left/right buttons or
the jog dial, select “Execute,” then press
USB Flash Drives the SEL/SET button or the jog dial.
The in-progress message and status bar (%)
UDF are displayed, and formatting is started.
In UDF or exFAT, you can connect a USB flash When formatting is completed, the message
drive to the external device connector (page 11) “Format USB Memory Done” is displayed.
to record, save, and load the following data. The \MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\MEMDISC
• “Loading a Planning Metadata file” (page 51) folder and the \General\Sony\Planning folder
• “Storing/Retrieving the Setting Data” (page are automatically created in the drive.
50) If the format operation fails
A format operation may fail because the USB
The following Sony USB flash drives are flash drive is write protected, or because it is not
recommended for use with this camcorder. the type of drive specified for use with this
• USM-M Series camcorder.
In this case, an error message appears. Follow the
Notes
instructions in the error message and exchange
• Use USB flash drives with a capacity of 4 GB to 32 the drive for one that can be used with this
GB.
• USB flash drives other than those listed above may not camcorder.
be recognized if connected to the external device
connector.

24 Using Other Media

Restoring USB Flash Drives
When you load a USB flash drive that cannot be
mounted normally because the file system is
destroyed, a message appears on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen to ask whether you want to
restore it.
Using the up/down/left/right buttons or the jog

Preparations
dial, select “Execute,” then press the SEL/SET
button or the jog dial. The in-progress message
and status bar (%) are displayed, and restoration
is started.
When restoration is completed, the message
“Restore USB Memory Done” is displayed.

• “XQD” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

Using Other Media 25

 Recording
Basic Operation Procedure

4 Open the lens cap

7, 8 REC START/STOP
9 REC REVIEW (on the grip)
Recording

5 Power switch:
ON (the " position)

3
LCD monitor
angle 6 1 Battery pack insertion
adjustment FULL AUTO
2 SxS memory card slots

Preparations Note
When you hold the camcorder by the grip, support it
from underneath with your left hand.
1 Mount a fully charged battery pack.

2 Load SxS memory card(s). Recording (Full Auto mode)

If you load two cards, recording is continued
by automatically switching to the second 6 Press the FULL AUTO button so that
card when the first card becomes full. the button indicator lights.
Full Auto mode is turned on, TLCS (Total
3 Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor for Level Control System) (page 89) is activated,
the best view. Auto Iris, AGC (Auto Gain Control), Auto
When you wish to use the EVF, fold the LCD Shutter, and ATW (Auto Tracing White) are
monitor to its park position and adjust the set to ON, then, consequently the brightness
angle of the EVF. and white balance will always be adjusted
automatically.
4 Open the lens cap. When you wish to adjust them manually, turn
Pull up the lens cap open/close lever to open Full Auto mode off, and see;
the lens cap built in the lens hood. “Iris” on page 31
“Gain” on page 30
5 Set the power switch to the ON position. “Electronic Shutter” on page 31
“White Balance” on page 29
The recording screen is displayed.
Note
When using the remote commander, activate the AF (Auto Focus) is not activated by setting the
remote control mode (page 19). camcorder to Full Auto mode.

26 Basic Operation Procedure

 For information of automatic focus adjustment,
see “Focus” (page 32). Checking the last recorded clip (Rec
Review)
7 Press the REC START/STOP button.
You can also start recording with the REC 9 Press the REC REVIEW button.
START button on the grip. The Rec Review function (page 37) is
(If you are using the IR Remote Commander, press activated, and the last recorded clip is played
the START/STOP button.) back for the specified time on the LCD
The TALLY lamp lights and recording monitor/EVF screen.
begins.
To delete clips
8 To stop recording, press the REC You can delete the last recorded clip by using the
START/STOP button again. Last Clip DEL function (page 50). Use the All
You can also stop recording with the REC Clips DEL function (page 50) to delete all

Recording
START button on the grip. recorded clips from an SxS memory card. To
(If you are using the IR Remote Commander, press specify a clip to be deleted, operate the camcorder
the START/STOP button.) from the thumbnail screen (page 68).
Recording stops and the camcorder enters
Clip (recording data)
STBY (recording standby) mode.
When you stop recording, video, audio and
Note subsidiary data from the start to end of the
If you press the REC START/STOP button to start next recording are recorded as a single clip on an
recording while previous data writing is not completed, SxS memory card.
the message “Cannot Proceed” may be displayed and
recording may not start.
Clip name
For each clip recorded with this camcorder, a
To prevent a switching error clip name is automatically generated according
The REC START/STOP button on the handle is to the method selected with “Auto Naming” in
incorporated with the REC HOLD lever. If the “Clip” (page 106) of the OTHERS menu.
REC START/STOP button on the handle will not The default setting of “Auto Naming” is “Plan.”
be used, it is recommended to set the lever to the With this setting, a clip name defined in
HOLD position to lock the button and prevent planning metadata is applied if a planning
unintentional starting/stopping of recording if metadata file is loaded into the camcorder.
you accidentally press the button. Change the “Auto Naming” setting to “Title” to
To unlock the button, return the lever to its apply a clip name composed of 4 to 46
original position. alphanumerics and 4 numerics.
On holding the handle Example: ABCD0001
When shooting by holding the handle, hold the The block of 4 to 46 alphanumerics can be
front end of the handle to keep the camcorder specified as desired using “Clip” in the
steady. OTHERS menu before you start recording. (It
cannot be changed after recording.)
The value of the 4 numerics is automatically
counted up in sequence.
Notes on Clips
The maximum file size for a clip is 43 GB for
UDF and exFAT, 4 GB for FAT HD Mode, and
2 GB for FAT SD Mode. If you continue
recording for an extended period, recorded
materials may be segmented into multiple files,
depending on the file size (the maximum
number of partitions is 99). The camcorder
regards continuous recording as one clip even if
it has been segmented into multiple files in FAT
mode.

Basic Operation Procedure 27

 A long clip can be recorded crossing over two
memory cards in slot A and B. Changing Basic Settings
When you copy recorded clips to a hard disk,
etc., via computer, it is recommended to use the
dedicated application software, which you need You can make changes to the settings based on
to download, to maintain the continuity of the intended usage of the recorded video or
recorded materials. For details, see “Software recording conditions.
Downloads” (page 157).
Note Video Formats
If copying is done using Explorer (Windows) or
Finder (MAC), the continuity and relationships of Selectable formats vary depending on the UDF/
recorded materials may not be maintained. exFAT/FAT, HD Mode/SD Mode, and usage
Maximum duration of a clip region (NTSC Area/PAL Area) settings.
Recording

The maximum clip length is 24 hours for FAT You can change the usage area by setting “Country”
(MP4 or AVI) and 6 hours for UDF (MXF) and in “System” (page 105) of the OTHERS menu.
exFAT (MXF).
If you exceed the maximum clip length, a new Switching between UDF/exFAT/FAT
clip will be automatically created. You can
check the new clip on the thumbnail screen. Switch by setting “F.Sys.” in “System” (page
105) of the OTHERS menu.
After switching this setting, the camcorder will
automatically restart.
Note
UDF/exFAT/FAT cannot be switched during recording
or playback.

Switching between HD Mode/SD Mode

For HD/SD switching, use “System” (page 105)
of the OTHERS menu.
After switching this setting, the camcorder will
automatically restart.
Note
HD/SD switching is disabled during recording and
playback.

Switching between XAVC/MPEG2

For XAVC/MPEG2 switching, use “System”
(page 105) of the OTHERS menu.
“XAVC/MPEG2” can be selected only when
“F.Sys.” of the OTHERS menu is set to “exFAT”
and “HD/SD” of the OTHERS menu is set to
“HD.”
Note
XAVC/MPEG2 switching is disabled during recording
and playback.

28 Changing Basic Settings

 balance, even in ATW mode, by pressing the
Changing the format button.
To change the format, use “Format” in “System”
Note
(page 105) of the OTHERS menu.
Signals from the SDI OUT, A/V OUT, and HDMI Under some conditions of lighting or the shooting
subject, adjustment by ATW may fail to provide proper
OUT connectors are also output according to the colors.
format selected with this menu. Examples:
• When the subject of a substantially single color like
sky, sea, ground, grass, or certain kinds of flowers
ND Filter occupies most of the frame area.
• When the subject is under a light source of extremely
high or extremely low color temperature.
ND filters are available for keeping the aperture If execution of automatic tracing by the ATW function
in a proper range. takes an unacceptably long time or only results in an
2: 1/64ND inadequate effect, then execute the AWB function.

Recording
1: 1/8ND
CLEAR: ND filter not used Using the switch
Make a selection with the WHITE BAL switch
(page 10).
White Balance B: ATW mode or Memory B mode
A: Memory A mode
You can select the adjustment mode according to
PRST: Preset mode
the shooting conditions.
The B position of the WHITE BAL switch is
Preset mode assigned to ATW mode at the factory. The setting
The color temperature is adjusted to the preset can be changed with “White Switch <B>” (page
value (factory setting: 3200K) in this mode. 89) of the CAMERA SET menu to select Memory
Select this mode when there is no time to adjust B mode.
the white balance or when you wish to fix the Setting the camcorder to Full Auto mode (page
white balance to the condition of you set for a 26) forcibly activates ATW mode.
Picture Profile. Assigning the ATW on/off function to an
Memory A mode, Memory B mode assignable button (page 37) permits you to
The white balance is adjusted to the value stored independently activate/deactivate ATW when
in memory A or memory B. Full Auto mode is off.
Pressing the WHITE BAL button executes auto
white balance and stores the adjusted value in Using the Direct menu
memory A or memory B. When you press the DISPLAY button (page 9),
When the Wi-Fi remote commander is used and the current adjustment mode and color
the ATW function is set to off, the adjusted value temperature are displayed on the screen (page
is changed to the one in memory A, irrespective 13).
of the status of the WHITE BAL switch. ATW: ATW mode
ATW (Auto-Tracing White balance) mode W:A: Memory A mode
In this mode, the camcorder automatically adjusts W:B: Memory B mode
the white balance to the appropriate condition. W:P: Preset mode
When the color temperature of the light source When the Direct menu (page 15) is in All mode,
changes, the white balance adjustment is you can select from among ATW, W:A, W:B, and
automatically executed. W:P.
Five steps of adjustment speed can be selected When the Direct menu is in Part mode, you can
with “ATW Speed” (page 89) of the CAMERA switch between ATW and the mode set with the
SET menu. WHITE BAL switch.
When the ATW Hold function is assigned to an When W:NS is displayed, switching via the
assignable button (page 37), you can Direct menu is not possible.
momentarily hold the ATW value to fix the white

Changing Basic Settings 29

 Executing Auto White Balance Changing the zebra pattern
Using “Zebra” (page 97) in the LCD/VF SET
1 To store the adjustment value in menu, you can change the zebra pattern to be
memory, select Memory A or Memory displayed.
B mode.

2 Place a white subject under the same Gain

lighting condition and zoom in on it so
that a white area is obtained on the
Recording with Fixed Gain
screen.
You can change the gain of the video amplifier.
3 Adjust the brightness. Selecting the gain with the switch
Adjust Iris as instructed in “Adjusting the
Recording

The gain value at each of the GAIN switch (page

brightness manually” (page 31) below. 10) positions set at the factory are as follows:
L: 0 dB
4 Press the WHITE BAL button (page 7). M: 9 dB
When you execute the adjustment in a memory H: 18 dB
mode, the adjusted value is stored in memory (A These values can be changed in the range of
or B) selected in step 1. –3 dB to +18 dB, using the CAMERA SET
When you execute the adjustment in ATW mode, menu’s Gain Setup menu (page 84).
adjustment in ATW is resumed.
Note
Notes You cannot select a fixed gain when AGC mode is set to
• Auto white balance adjustment cannot be performed On.
when in Preset mode.
Selecting gain using the Direct menu
• If auto white balance adjustment fails, an error
message is displayed on the screen for approximately When you press the DISPLAY button (page 9),
3 seconds. If the error message continues to be the current gain value is displayed on the screen
displayed after several attempts, consult your Sony (page 13).
service representative.
When the Direct menu is in All mode, you can
change the gain in steps of 3 dB with the Direct
Markers/Zebra Patterns menu.
You can also select AGC mode with the Direct
During recording, various markers and zebra menu.
patterns can be inserted into the image on the When the Direct menu is in Part mode, you can
LCD monitor/EVF screen. switch between only AGC mode and the gain
This does not affect recording signals. selected with the GAIN switch.

Displaying the Markers Recording in AGC Mode

Use “Marker” (page 97) of the LCD/VF SET The gain of the video amplifier is automatically
menu. adjusted according to the picture brightness.
When you set the camcorder to Full Auto mode
Displaying the Zebra Patterns (page 26), AGC mode is forcibly selected.
When Full Auto mode is off, you can
A zebra pattern(s) can be inserted to the picture independently turn AGC mode on by setting
on LCD monitor/EVF screen to check the “AGC” in “TLCS” (page 89) of the CAMERA
appropriate luminance level. SET menu to “On,” or selecting “AGC” with the
Pressing the ZEBRA button (ASSIGN 1 button) Direct menu.
(page 10) turns the zebra pattern-indication on/
off.

30 Changing Basic Settings

Electronic Shutter Shooting in Auto Shutter Mode
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted
Recording with a fixed shutter according to the picture brightness.
When you set the camcorder to Full Auto mode
Set the shutter speed (cache time). (page 26), Auto Shutter is forcibly selected.
When you set the SHUTTER switch (page 10) to When Full Auto mode is off, you can
ON, the fixed shutter is turned on in the mode and independently turn Auto Shutter mode on by
with the shutter speed you specified with setting “Auto Shutter” in “TLCS” (page 89) of
“Shutter” (page 84) of the CAMERA SET menu. the CAMERA SET menu to “On.”
Notes
• When Auto Shutter mode is on, the fixed shutter
cannot be selected.
Iris

Recording
• When the SLS/EX SLS mode (page 31) is on, the fixed
shutter cannot be selected. Adjust the brightness according to the subject.
Setting with the CAMERA SET menu
The shutter mode and shutter speed can be set Recording in auto mode
with “Shutter” (page 84) of the CAMERA SET When Full Auto mode (page 26) is set to on:
menu. Iris is forcibly set to Auto mode.
Setting with the Direct menu When Full Auto mode is set to off:
When you press the DISPLAY button, the current When the IRIS switch is set to AUTO, Auto Iris
shutter mode and the set value are displayed mode is set.
(page 13). You can select the target level (to make the
When the Direct menu (page 15) is in All mode, picture darker or brighter) for Auto Iris via the
you can change the shutter mode and speed with Setup menu or Direct menu. (The gain control in
the Direct menu. AGC mode and the shutter speed control in Auto
Shutter mode are adjusted in synchronization.)
Notes
To adjust the target level with the Setup menu
• When the Direct menu is in Part mode, you cannot turn
the shutter off with the Direct menu if the SHUTTER Set “Level” in “TLCS” (page 89) of the
switch is set to ON. CAMERA SET menu.
If the SHUTTER switch is set to OFF, you can switch
only between Auto Shutter and Shutter OFF. To adjust the target level with the Direct menu
• The Direct menu cannot be selected when Full Auto The target level can also be selected using the
mode is turned on (page 26) or when the SLS/EX SLS Direct menu (page 15). When you press the
mode is set. DISPLAY button, the current Exposure position
is displayed on the screen (page 13).
Shooting in SLS/EX SLS Mode
The shutter speed is specified in the number of Adjusting the brightness manually
accumulated frames. Up to 64 frames can be
When Full Auto mode is set to off, setting the
accumulated in this mode, permitting you to
IRIS switch to MANUAL sets to Manual Iris
obtain low-noise clear pictures in low light levels
mode. Rotate the iris ring for the desired iris
or surreal pictures with afterimages.
opening.
For SLS/EX SLS, specify the number of
accumulated frames with “SLS/EX SLS” (page Switching to Auto Iris mode temporary
85) of the CAMERA SET menu. You can select By pressing the assignable button to which “One
from 2 to 8, 16, 32, 64 frames. Push Auto Iris” is assigned during Manual Iris
When SLS/EX SLS is ON, you cannot set Full mode, the One Push Auto Iris function is
Auto mode (page 26). activated. The One Push Auto Iris function is
When Full Auto mode (page 26) is on or Auto activated while pressing the button. When the
Shutter mode is on, and SLS/EX SLS is set to on, button is released, the camcorder returns to
Full Auto mode or Auto Shutter mode is Manual Iris mode.
canceled.

Changing Basic Settings 31

 Zoom When using a lens remote controller
Zooming can also be controlled from an optional
Operating Zoom manually lens remote controller connected via the LENS
REMOTE connector.
Setting the ZOOM switch (page 12) on the
For operation, refer to the operation guide of the lens
bottom of the camcorder to the MANUAL
remote controller.
position sets to manual zoom mode.

Using the Power Zoom Focus

The power zoom lever (page 12) on the grip and
the on-handle ZOOM button (page 9) are The infinity (∞ ) position has some margin to
activated. compensate for focus change caused by variation
in ambient temperature. When shooting an image
Recording

The supplied IR Remote Commander and

optional lens remote control unit can also be used. at infinity in MF mode, adjust the focus while
Setting the ZOOM switch on the bottom of the observing the image on the LCD monitor/EVF
camcorder to the SERVO position sets to power screen.
zoom mode.
The current zoom position is displayed on the Adjusting in Full MF Mode
screen in the range of 0 (Wide) to 99 (Tele) when Pull the focus ring rearward (toward the
you press the DISPLAY button. camcorder body) to set the camcorder to Full MF
The numerical indication can be changed to that mode. Focus can only be adjusted with the focus
in a bar by changing “Zoom Position” in “Display ring manually.
On/Off” (page 97) of the LCD/VF SET menu.
Note
To adjust with the power zoom lever on the grip
The focus instantly moves to the range index position
Pressing the lever deeper sets zooming faster. when you pull the focus ring rearward.
To adjust with the on-handle ZOOM button
You can select the zoom speed with “Handle Rotate the focus ring for the best focus while
Zoom” (page 86) of the CAMERA SET menu. observing the picture on the LCD monitor/EVF
The “Vari” setting enables faster zoom speed the screen.
deeper the on-handle ZOOM button is pressed as The range index of the focus ring is effective in
in the case of the power zoom lever on the grip. Full MF mode. The distances correspond to the
The zoom speed assignment can be changed with focus ring positions.
“Zoom Speed” (page 86) of the CAMERA SET Focus Magnifier
menu. When you press the FOCUS MAG button, the
You can select Soft mode for zooming by using center area of the picture is magnified on the LCD
“Zoom Transition” (page 86) of the CAMERA monitor/EVF screen, making the focus
SET menu, in which the zooming speed is adjustment easier.
gradually increased at the beginning then Press the FOCUS MAG button again or leave the
gradually decreased for the end. focus ring unmoved for 5 seconds to resume the
When adjusting with the ZOOM button of the IR normal angle for recording.
Remote Commander Peaking
The zooming speed depends on the “Remote” When you press the PEAKING button (ASSIGN
(page 86) setting in “Zoom Speed” of the 2 button), the peaking function is activated. This
CAMERA SET menu. function emphasizes the contours of the images
To use the IR Remote Commander, see “Using the IR on the LCD monitor/EVF screen, making manual
Remote Commander” (page 19). focusing easier.
This function does not affect recording signals.
The emphasis level and color of the contours can
be set with “Peaking” (page 96) of the LCD/VF
SET menu.

32 Changing Basic Settings

Adjusting in MF Mode Steady Shot
MF (Manual Focus) mode allows you to activate
Auto Focus momentarily when required. By activating the Steady Shot function, blurring
Slide the focus ring forward (to lens hood side), of images due to camera shaking can be reduced.
then set the FOCUS switch (page 10) to
MANUAL. Press the STEADY SHOT button on the
In this mode, expanded focus function, peaking lens.
function, one-push auto focus function, and the Pressing the button turns the Steady Shot function
MF Assist function are activated. on or off.
Rotate the focus ring while looking at the LCD The setting of the Steady Shot function is
monitor/EVF screen to adjust the focus. displayed in the EVF screen.
One-Push (Momentary) Auto Focusing
Note

Recording
When you press the PUSH AUTO button, auto
focusing momentarily activates. One-Push Auto If the camcorder is fixed to a tripod for stable
Focusing is terminated when the subject comes condition, deactivate the Steady Shot function.
into focus.
MF Assist function Flickers
If you set “MF Assist” (page 85) of the
CAMERA SET menu to “On” to enable the MF
Assist function, auto focusing is engaged when
Setting the shutter speed according to
you stop rotating the lens operation ring, the power-supply frequency
performing fine focus adjustment for the subject Activate the electronic shutter (page 31) and set
in the center of the screen. When the fine the shutter speed according to the power supply
adjustment is completed, automatic focusing with frequency.
the MF Assist function is terminated.
When the frequency is 50 Hz
You can also enable the MF Assist function via
Set the shutter speed to 1/50 or 1/100 seconds.
the Direct menu (page 15). When you press the
DISPLAY button, the selected focus mode is When the frequency is 60 Hz
displayed on the screen (page 13). The Direct Set the shutter speed to 1/60 or 1/120 seconds.
menu cannot be selected in a mode other than MF
mode. Using the Flicker-Reduction function
Set “Mode” in “Flicker Reduce” (page 85) of the
Adjusting in AF Mode CAMERA SET menu to “Auto” or “On” and set
AF (Auto Focus) mode adjusts the focus “Frequency” to the power-supply frequency (50
automatically. Hz or 60 Hz).
Slide the focus ring forward, then set the FOCUS
Note
switch to AUTO.
If the frame rate selected for recording is close to the
power-supply frequency, flicker may not be reduced
Using Macro Mode sufficiently even if you activate the Flicker-Reduction
function. In such cases, use the electronic shutter.
When you set the MACRO switch to ON in AF or
MF mode, Macro mode is activated, permitting
you to adjust the focus in a range that includes the
macro area.
The Macro mode is invalid in Full MF mode.

Changing Basic Settings 33

 Time Data
Recording Audio Signals
Setting the Timecode
Four channels (CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4) of audio
Specify the timecode to be recorded with
can be recorded (Linear PCM recording) in
“Timecode” and “TC Format” of the TC/UB SET
synchronization with video recording.
menu (page 99).
You can use the built-in stereo microphones
(omni-directional electret condenser
Setting the Users Bit microphones) or 2-channel external audio inputs
You can add a hexadecimal number of 8 digits for to the AUDIO IN connectors by switching with
pictures as the user bits. the AUDIO IN switches.
The user bits can also be set to the current date.
Recording

Use “Users Bit” (page 99) of the TC/UB SET

menu. Using the Built-in Stereo
Microphones
Displaying the Time Data
Set the AUDIO IN switches, both CH-1 and
Pressing the DISPLAY button displays the time CH-2 (page 10), to INT.
data on the screen (page 13).
The indication is switched among the timecode,
user bits, and recording duration each time you Using External Inputs
press the DURATION/TC/U-BIT button (page
9). 1 Set the AUDIO IN switches CH-1 and
Display Contents CH-2 to EXT.
TCG **:**:**:** Timecode
CLK **:**:**:** Timecode (Clock mode)
2 Connect external audio sources to the
UBG ** ** ** ** User bits
AUDIO IN connectors CH-1 and CH-2
DUR **:**:** Duration from the beginning of (page 8).
recording
3 Set the input (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V)
switches CH-1 and CH-2 (page 8) to
LINE (line level: +4 dBu).

Using an External Microphone

You can use an external microphone for
recording, such as the ECM-673 Electret
Condenser Microphone.

1 Lift up the handle of the external

microphone holder (page 8) and open
the cover.

2 Attach a microphone, then return the

external microphone holder cover to its
original position to secure it.

34 Recording Audio Signals

3 Connect the microphone cable to the
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors. Adjusting the Audio Recording
Levels
External
microphone To adjust the levels automatically (AGC)
When the AUDIO SELECT switches CH-1 and
CH-2 (page 10) are set to AUTO, the audio
recording levels are automatically adjusted.

To adjust the levels manually

Set the AUDIO SELECT switches CH-1 and CH-
to AUDIO IN
2 to MANUAL and adjust the audio recording

Recording
levels by turning the AUDIO LEVEL knobs
Cable (page 10).
clamp Set the controls to 5 for the reference setting (0
dB). Setting to 10 maximizes the level (+12 dB),
and setting to 0 minimizes it (–∞ ).
4 Set the corresponding AUDIO IN The input levels are displayed on the screen when
switch (CH-1/CH-2) (page 10) to EXT. you press the DISPLAY button (page 13).

5 Set the corresponding input (LINE/ Audio recording in special recording

MIC/MIC+48V) switch (CH-1/CH-2) modes
(page 8) according to the connected
microphone. No audio recording is made in Interval Recording
or Frame Recording.
MIC: For a microphone that requires no
No audio recording is made in Slow & Quick
power supply
recording if the recording frame rate is set to a
MIC +48V: For a microphone that requires
value different from the playback frame rate.
+48V power supply (such as the ECM-
673)
Monitoring the Audio
You can monitor the sounds being recorded with
the headphones connected to the headphone
connector (stereo mini jack) (page 7).
Note
The built-in speaker is disabled during recording (or
when standing by to record).
To adjust the audio monitoring volume
Use the VOLUME buttons (page 9).

Recording Audio Signals 35

 For operations to add shot marks after recording,
see “Adding Shot Marks During Playback (UDF,
Useful Functions exFAT, and FAT HD Mode)” on page 71 and
“Adding/Deleting Shot Marks (UDF, exFAT, and
FAT HD Mode)” on page 77.
Color Bars/Reference Tone For operation to apply a name to a shot mark, see
“Defining Shot Mark names in Planning Metadata”
By setting “Camera/Bars” in “Color Bars” (page on page 53.
85) of the CAMERA SET menu to “Bars,” you
can output a color-bar signal in place of the
camera picture. When this item is set to OK/NG/KP Flags (UDF and exFAT)
“Camera,” the output returns to the camera
picture. You can add OK/NG/KP flags to clips recorded
A 1-kHz reference tone is output with the color with UDF or exFAT. By adding flags, you can set
Recording

bar signal if “1KHz Tone” in “Audio Input” (page the camcorder to display only clips with certain
91) of the AUDIO SET menu is set to “On.” flag settings on the thumbnail screen (OK/NG/
The color-bar signal and reference-tone signal are KP/None-Clip thumbnail screen) (page 69).
also fed out from the SDI OUT, HDMI OUT, Note
i.LINK, VIDEO OUT (color bars only), and A/V
Use the “Lock Clip” setting (page 72) to protect clips.
OUT connectors.
You can select the type of color bars with “Bars
Adding a flag
Type” in “Color Bars” of the CAMERA SET
menu. During recording or playback, press the
Notes assignable button to which you assigned the
Clip Flag OK/Clip Flag NG/Clip Flag Keep
• The color bar mode cannot be output in Slow & Quick
Motion mode and SLS/EX SLS mode. function.
• You cannot switch to “Color Bars” while recording. You can add an OK/NG/KP flag to a clip during
(Switching from “Color Bars” to “Camera” is recording or playback.
available.)
Deleting a flag
Shot Marks Press the assignable button, twice in
succession, to which you assigned the Clip
When you record shot marks for important scenes Flag OK/Clip Flag NG/Clip Flag Keep
of a clip recorded in UDF, exFAT, or FAT HD function.
Mode as subsidiary data, you can access the You can delete the OK/NG/KP flag from a clip.
marked points easily on a Shot Mark screen (page
OK/NG/KP flags can also be added and deleted from
76), which only displays scenes with shot marks the thumbnail screen. For details, see “Adding/
only. This increases editing efficiency. Deleting a Flag (UDF and exFAT)” (page 74).
The camcorder permits you to record two types of
shot marks: shot mark 1 and shot mark 2.
Shot marks can be recorded as needed during OK Mark (FAT HD Mode Only)
recording or can be added after recording while
checking the playback pictures on the thumbnail By adding the OK mark to a clip recorded in FAT
screen. HD Mode, you can prevent the clip from being
deleted or divided inadvertently. You can also set
Inserting a shot mark during recording the camcorder to display only clips with the OK
mark on the thumbnail screen (OK-Clip
If the Shot Mark1 or Shot Mark2 function is
thumbnail screen) (page 69).
assigned to an assignable button (page 37), press
the button where you want to insert a shot mark.

36 Useful Functions
 was from SP 1440×1080/23.98P to SP 1440×1080/
Adding the OK mark 59.94i).
• The Setup and PICTURE PROFILE menus cannot be
When recording of a clip ends, press the operated during Rec Review.
assignable button to which you assigned the
OK Mark function.
While standing by to record, you can also add an
Assignable Buttons
OK mark to the last-recorded clip (“Last Clip”) The camcorder has five assignable buttons (page
on the selected memory card. 10) to which you can assign various functions for
convenience.
Deleting the OK mark
To change functions
Press the assignable button to which you Use “Assign Button” (page 103) of the OTHERS
assigned the OK Mark function, and select menu.

Recording
“Execute.” The assigned functions can be viewed on the
While standing by to record, you can also delete Button/Remote status screen (page 80).
the OK mark from the clip with the last-added OK
mark.
Interval Recording
Adding or deleting the OK mark to or from The Interval Recording (time-lapse recording)
clips before the last one function is especially effective for shooting
objects that move very slowly.
Make changes via the thumbnail screen.
The specified number of frames are automatically
For details on making settings, see “Adding/Deleting recorded at the specified intervals.
the OK Mark (FAT HD Mode Only)” (page 74).
Recording interval (Interval Time)

Rec Review
You can review the last recorded clip on the
screen (Rec Review).
Press the REC REVIEW button (page 12)
after recording is finished.
If the Rec Review function is assigned to an
assignable button (page 37), you can also use that
button.
The last 3 seconds, 10 seconds, or the entire part Number of frames for one recording session
of the clip is displayed, depending on the “Rec (Number of Frames)
Review” setting (page 89) of the CAMERA SET
menu. It is recommended to fix the camcorder to a tripod
Rec Review is terminated at the end of the clip, or equivalent and use the IR Remote Commander
resuming STBY (recording standby) status. to start/stop recording rather than pressing the
REC START/STOP button of the camcorder.
To interrupt Rec Review
Press the REC REVIEW or STOP/CAM button Notes
or the assignable button to which you assigned the • Audio cannot be recorded in Interval Recording mode.
Rec Review function. • Interval Recording cannot be set to “On”
simultaneously with Frame Recording, Picture Cache
Notes Recording, Slow & Quick Motion, Clip Continuous
Recording, or Proxy Recording. When you set Interval
• During Rec Review playback, the playback control
Recording to “On,” these other functions are forcibly
buttons other than the STOP/CAM button are disabled.
set to “Off.”
• If the video format was changed after recording, Rec
• Interval Recording mode cannot be used when
Review cannot be performed (except when the change
“Format” in “System” (page 105) of the OTHERS
menu is set to “HQ 1280×720/23.98P” (in UDF HD

Useful Functions 37
 Mode and FAT HD Mode) or “SP 1440×1080/23.98P” exFAT HD Mode) or “SP 1440×1080/23.98P” (in
(in FAT HD Mode). FAT HD Mode).
• Interval Recording mode cannot be used when the • Frame Recording mode cannot be used when the items
items “DVCAM” or “HDV” are set for “SDI/HDMI/ “DVCAM” or “HDV” are set for “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK
i.LINK I/O Select” (page 93) of the VIDEO SET I/O Select” (page 93) of the VIDEO SET menu, and
menu, and the video format of “Format” in “System” the video format of “Format” in “System” (page 105)
(page 105) of the OTHERS menu is set to other than of the OTHERS menu is set to other than “HQ mode/
“HQ mode/23.98P.” 23.98P.”

Preparatory settings Preparatory settings

Before starting Interval Recording, make the Before starting Frame Recording, make the
necessary settings of the CAMERA SET menu necessary settings of the CAMERA SET menu
(page 86) in advance. (page 86) in advance.

Performing Interval Recording Performing Frame Recording

Recording

When the preparatory settings are completed, you When the preparatory settings are completed, you
can start recording. can start recording.
Press the REC START/STOP button.
1 Press the REC START/STOP button.
Notes When the number of frames you specified
• You cannot change the “Interval Time” and “Number with the menu are recorded, the camcorder
of Frames” settings while Interval Recording is in automatically enters FRM STBY (Frame Rec
progress. To change them, pause recording.
Standby) status.
• After starting Interval Recording, Rec Review
operation is disabled, even during an interval.
• The timecode is recorded in Rec Run mode (page 99) 2 Press the REC START/STOP button
during Interval Recording. again.
• Some extra frames may be recorded if you stop
recording or switch the card slot while recording is Each time you press the REC START/STOP
halted in Interval Recording mode. button, the camcorder records the specified
• “Setting” for “Interval Rec” is automatically set to number of frames then enters FRM STBY
“Off” when you set the power switch to OFF, while the status.
“Interval Time” and “Number of Frames” settings are
maintained. Notes
• Recording cannot be stopped until the specified
number of frames are recorded. If the power switch is
Frame Recording set to OFF during recording, the power is only shut off
after the specified number of frames are recorded.
The Frame Recording function is especially • The Rec Review function cannot be used while
effective for clay animation recording. recording in Frame Rec mode is in progress.
• You cannot change the “Number of Frames” setting
The specified number of frames are recorded
while recording in Frame Rec mode is in progress. To
intermittently when you press the REC START/ change it, pause the recording.
STOP button. • The timecode is recorded in Rec Run mode (page 99)
It is recommended to fix the camcorder to a tripod during Frame Recording.
• Some extra frames may be recorded if you stop
or equivalent and use the IR Remote Commander
recording or switch the card slot while recording is
to start/stop recording rather than pressing the paused in Frame Rec mode.
REC START/STOP button of the camcorder. • “Setting” for “Frame Rec” is automatically set to “Off”
when you set the power switch to OFF, while the
Notes “Number of Frames” setting is maintained.
• Audio cannot be recorded in Frame Recording mode.
• Frame Recording cannot be set to “On” simultaneously
with Interval Recording, Picture Cache Recording,
Slow & Quick Motion, Clip Continuous Recording, or
Proxy Recording. When you set Frame Recording to
“On,” these other functions are forcibly set to “Off.”
• Frame Recording mode cannot be used when “Format”
in “System” (page 105) of the OTHERS menu is set to
“HQ 1280×720/23.98P” (in UDF HD Mode and

38 Useful Functions
 flashing (1 time per second), you can remove the SxS
Clip Continuous Recording (UDF memory card.
• Record for at least 2 seconds before you stop
and exFAT) recording.
To disable Clip Continuous Recording mode
Clips are normally created individually for each
While standing by to record, set “Setting” in
time you start and stop recording, but you can also
“Clip Cont. Rec” (page 87) of the CAMERA SET
continue recording to a single clip regardless of
menu to “Off.”
the number of times you start and stop recording
by using the Clip Continuous Recording function, Restricted Operations
which will add recordings to the same clip until If you perform any of the following operations
the function is disabled or turned off. while recording or standing by to record, 1
This is convenient for when you do not want to continuous clip will not be created. The next time
create a large number of short clips, or when you you start recording, a new clip will be created.
do not want to be restricted by a maximum • Performing clip operations (locking, deleting,

Recording
number of clips. or changing the names of clips).
A recording start mark is added to each point at • Switching the memory card slot.
which you resume recording, making it easy to • Changing the recording format.
search for each point. • Setting the power switch to OFF.
• Displaying the thumbnail screen.
Preparatory settings • Playing clips.

Before starting Clip Continuous Recording, make

the necessary settings to “Clip Cont. Rec” (page Picture Cache Recording:
87) of the CAMERA SET menu in advance.
When you set “Setting” to “On,” the Clip
Retroactively Record
Continuous Recording function is enabled, and
When the Picture Cache Recording function is
“CONT” appears on the screen (page 13).
active, the camcorder stores the last few seconds
You can also assign “Clip Cont. Rec” to an
of video captured in the built-in cache memory to
assignable button (page 37), and set “Setting” to
permit you to start recording video on an SxS
“On”/“Off” by pressing the button.
memory card from a point before you press the
Notes REC START/STOP button. The maximum
• Clip Continuous Recording cannot be set to “On” picture cache time is 15 seconds.
simultaneously with Picture Cache Recording, Interval
Notes
Recording, Frame Recording, Slow & Quick Motion,
or Proxy Recording. When you set Clip Continuous • Picture Cache Recording cannot be set to “On”
Recording to “On,” these other functions are forcibly simultaneously with Frame Recording, Interval
set to “Off.” Recording, Slow & Quick Motion, Clip Continuous
• Clip Continuous Recording cannot be used while Recording, or Proxy Recording. When you set Picture
recording. Cache Recording to “On,” these functions are
• This function cannot be used with FAT. forcefully disabled.
• Picture Cache Recording mode cannot be used while
recording, or while using Recording Review or Freeze
Performing Clip Continuous Recording Mix.
When the preparatory settings are completed, you • Picture Cache Recording is set to “Off” when you
change any of the settings in “System” (page 105) of
can start recording. the OTHERS menu.
Press the REC START/STOP button. • When Picture Cache Recording is “On,” the time code
is always recorded in Free Run mode regardless of the
When recording starts, the “CONT” indication on TC/UB SET menu settings (page 99).
the screen changes to “zREC” (with z in red). • When “Format” in “System” of the OTHERS menu is
set to XAVC-I, the Picture Cache time can be set up to
Notes 4 seconds.
• If you remove the SxS memory card or the battery
while recording or standing by to record (the “CONT”
indication appears), the SxS memory card must be
restored. Only remove the SxS memory card after Clip
Continuous Recording is complete. If “CONT” is

Useful Functions 39
 Preparatory settings Slow & Quick Motion
Before starting Picture Cache Recording, set
“P.Cache Rec” (page 87) of the CAMERA SET When the camcorder is in UDF HD Mode, exFAT
menu. HD Mode, or FAT HD Mode and the video
“Setting” for Picture Cache Recording can also be format (page 105) is set to one of the following
set to “On”/“Off” by assigning it to an assignable settings, you can set the recording frame rate and
button (page 37) and using that button. playback frame rate to different values.
When the setting has been made, the special NTSC Area
recording/operation status indication block on the HD422 50/1080/29.97P
screen shows “zCACHE,” with z in green HD422 50/1080/23.98P
(page 13). HD422 50/720/59.94P
HD422 50/720/29.97P
Performing Picture Cache Recording
Recording

HD422 50/720/23.98P
XAVC-I 1080/29.97P
Press the REC START/STOP button. XAVC-L50 1080/29.97P
Recording begins, and stored video in the cache XAVC-L35 1080/29.97P
memory is written first to the SxS memory card. XAVC-I 1080/23.98P
The on-screen “zCACHE” indication changes to XAVC-L50 1080/23.98P
“zREC” (z is red). XAVC-L35 1080/23.98P
To cancel the Picture Cache Recording function XAVC-I 720/59.94P
Set “Setting” in “P.Cache Rec” of the CAMERA XAVC-L50 720/59.94P
SET menu to “Off” or press the assignable button HQ 1920×1080/29.97P
to which you assigned the Picture Cache function. HQ 1920×1080/23.98P
HQ 1280×720/59.94P
Notes HQ 1280×720/29.97P
• If you change the recording format, the cached data are HQ 1280×720/23.98P (FAT HD Mode only)
cleared and caching is newly started. Therefore, data
cached before you changed the format cannot be PAL Area
recorded if you start Picture Cache Recording HD422 50/1080/25P
immediately after changing the format. HD422 50/720/50P
• If you start/stop Picture Cache Recording immediately
HD422 50/720/25P
after you insert an SxS memory card, data may not be
recorded on the card. XAVC-I 1080/25P
• Picture caching starts when you activate the Picture XAVC-L50 1080/25P
Cache Recording function. Therefore, video before the XAVC-L35 1080/25P
function is activated cannot be recorded with Picture
XAVC-I 720/50P
Cache Recording.
• Picture Cache Recording is invalid for external input XAVC-L50 720/50P
signal (HDV). HQ 1920×1080/25P
• As picture caching is disabled while an SxS memory HQ 1280×720/50P
card is being accessed, such as during playback, Rec
HQ 1280×720/25P
Review, or thumbnail screen display, Picture Cache
Recording of such a period cannot be made. Notes
• Although you can change the cache time setting while
recording, any new value becomes valid only after • Slow & Quick Motion recording cannot be used in SD
recording has stopped. Mode.
• Slow & Quick Motion cannot be set to “On”
simultaneously with Frame Recording, Interval
Recording, Picture Cache Recording, Clip Continuous
Recording, or Proxy Recording. When you set Slow &
Quick Motion to “On,” these other functions are
forcibly set to “Off.”
• Slow & Quick Motion mode cannot be used while
recording, or while using Recording Review or Freeze
Mix.
• Slow & Quick Motion mode cannot be used when
“SLS/EX SLS” (page 85) of the CAMERA SET menu
is set to other than “OFF.”

40 Useful Functions
• Audio cannot be recorded when the recording and
playback frame rates differ. Superimposing a Freeze Mix image
While recording or reviewing images by pressing
Preparatory settings the REC REVIEW button, press the ASSIGN
Before starting Slow & Quick Motion recording, button to which you assigned “Freeze Mix” at the
set “S&Q Motion” (page 87) of the CAMERA image with which you want to align. The image is
SET menu. displayed as a still picture over the current camera
When the special recording mode indication on picture.
the screen is active, “S&Q Motion” is displayed
on the screen (page 13). Canceling Freeze Mix status
Setting the recording frame rate with the Direct You can cancel it with the ASSIGN button to
menu which you assigned “Freeze Mix” or the REC
When the special recording mode indication on START/STOP button.

Recording
the screen is active, [Recording frame rate]/ When you cancel Freeze Mix status by pressing
[Playback frame rate fps] is displayed under the ASSIGN button, the normal camera picture is
“S&Q Motion.” displayed.
You can change the recording frame rate with the When you cancel Freeze Mix status by pressing
Direct menu (page 15). the REC START/STOP button, normal recording
begins.
Recording in Slow & Quick Motion Mode Notes
When the preparatory settings are completed, you • The Freeze Mix function cannot be used in SD Mode.
can start recording. • Freeze Mix cannot be used when “Format” in
“System” (page 105) of the OTHERS menu is set to
Press the REC START/STOP button. “HQ 1280×720/23.98P” (in UDF HD Mode and
exFAT HD Mode) or “SP 1440×1080/23.98P” (in
Notes FAT HD Mode).
• You cannot change the Frame Rate settings while Slow • If the “Format” setting of the recorded picture and the
& Quick Motion recording is in progress. To change current camera picture differ, the Freeze Mix display
them, pause the recording. cannot be achieved.
• The timecode is recorded in Rec Run mode during • The Freeze Mix display cannot be obtained in Slow &
Slow & Quick Motion recording (page 99). Quick Motion mode or Slow Shutter mode.
• When recording at a low-speed frame rate, it may take • You cannot operate the Setup menus and PICTURE
time until recording stops after you press the REC PROFILE menu in Freeze Mix status.
START/STOP button.
• Slow & Quick Motion mode is automatically set to
“Off” when you set the camcorder’s power switch to Automatic Adjustment of Flange
OFF. However, the Frame Rate setting is saved.
Focal Length
Freeze Mix: Image Alignment When automatic adjustment of flange focal
length is activated, focusing is performed both at
In UDF HD Mode, exFAT Mode, or FAT HD the wide-angle and telephoto ends of the zoom for
Mode, an image (still picture) of a recorded clip flange focal length adjustment and the result is
can be temporarily superimposed on the current stored so that the in-focus condition is maintained
camera picture, permitting you to easily align even if you change the zoom position after
images for your next recording. focusing.
Notes
To use the Freeze Mix function
• If a subject of insufficient contrast is used, or if the
Assign the Freeze Mix function to one of the camcorder or subject moves during the adjustment,
assignable buttons in advance (page 37). adjustment cannot be made properly. Once the
adjustment begins, do not touch the camcorder body or
lens until it ends.
• Set “SLS/EX SLS” of the CAMERA SET menu to
“OFF” before starting the adjustment.

Useful Functions 41
 • Be careful that no light source, such as a lamp, the sun,
or a bright window, is in field of view during flange Picture Profiles
focal length adjustment.
• Contact your dealer if a flange focal length adjustment
You can customize the picture quality, depending
chart is required.
on the conditions or circumstances of recording,
1 Set the power switch to ON. and store settings as a picture profile, enabling
you to recall the profile as necessary.
2 Set the ND FILTER switch to CLEAR. Six different picture profiles (PP1 to PP6) can be
stored in memory.
3 Place a high-contrast subject, such as a The same standard (reference) values are
flange focal length adjustment chart, registered to six picture profiles at the factory as
about 3 m (10 ft.) away from the those specified for the Picture Profile Off status.
camcorder, and light it well enough to
Note
provide a sufficient video output level.
Recording

Picture profiles can be set while recording or standing by

Frame the subject so that it is located in the to record. They cannot be operated from the thumbnail
center at the telephoto end of the zoom. Make screen.
sure that any object located closer to the lens
than the subject is out of frame at the wide- Registering the customized settings as a
angle end. Picture Profile
4 Set the ZOOM switch on the bottom of
1 Set the power switch (page 7) to ON to
the camcorder to SERVO (Power Zoom
turn on the camcorder.
mode).

5 Set “Auto FB Adjust” of the CAMERA

2 Press the PICTURE PROFILE button
(page 10).
SET menu to “Execute” in the setup
menu, then press the SEL/SET button The PICTURE PROFILE menu is displayed.
or the jog dial.
3 Using the up/down/left/right buttons or
The adjustment begins. the jog dial, select “SEL,” then press the
During adjustment, the in-progress message SEL/SET button or the jog dial.
is displayed.
When the adjustment finished, the 4 Select the number of the picture profile
completion message is displayed. to register from the list, then press the
Notes SEL/SET button or the jog dial.
• “Auto FB Adjust” cannot be selected when the ND
filter is set to 1 or 2.
5 Use the up/down buttons or the jog dial
• Do not change the ND filter while “Auto FB Adjust” is to select “SET,” then press the SEL/
in operation. SET button or the jog dial.
If you press the CANCEL button during
adjustment 6 Make each setting (page 44).
Automatic adjustment of the flange focal length is
aborted and the condition before starting the
7 When the settings have been made,
adjustment is resumed. press the PICTURE PROFILE button.

If the adjustment fails Selecting a registered Picture Profile

An error message is displayed.
Check the conditions of the subject and lighting Once you store a picture profile, you can recall
then perform the adjustment again. the picture quality registered in the picture
profile.

1 While standing by to record, press the

PICTURE PROFILE button (page 10).
The PICTURE PROFILE menu is displayed.

42 Useful Functions
2 Using the up/down/left/right buttons or
the jog dial, select “SEL,” then press the
SEL/SET button or the jog dial.

3 Select the number of the picture profile

to use from the list, then press the SEL/
SET button or the jog dial.
If OFF is selected, the picture quality is set to
standard and cannot be changed.

4 Press the PICTURE PROFILE button.

The picture profile being selected is displayed
when you press the DISPLAY button (page 13).

Recording
You can also select picture profiles with the
Direct menu (page 15).

Useful Functions 43
 Picture Profile Items
The values when “Off” is selected at “SEL” of the PICTURE PROFILE menu are shown in bold face
(example: Standard).

PICTURE PROFILE SET

Items Subitems and setting values Contents
Profile Name Profile name Set the profile name in 8 characters at maximum.
Changing the picture profile Standard You can use upper- and lowercase alphabetics,
name numerics 0 to 9, - (hyphen), _ (underscore) and
space.
Matrix Setting Set to “On” to activate the color phase adjustment
Adjusting the color phase On / Off function with matrix operations for the entire
over the entire area with picture.
Recording

matrix operations
Notes
• When this function is set to “Off,” Multi Matrix is
also set to “Off” in synchronization.
• If color saturation occurs under lighting that
contains excessive blue components (such as blue
LED lighting), set the “Setting” of “Matrix” to
“Off” to reduce the color saturation.
Select Select the built-in preset matrix provided for
1/2/3/4/5/6 convenience.
1: Equivalent to SMPTE-240M / 2: Equivalent to
ITU-709 / 3: Equivalent to SMPTE WIDE / 4:
Equivalent to NTSC / 5: Equivalent to EBU / 6:
Equivalent to PAL
Level Adjust the color saturation for the entire picture
–99 to +99 (±0) area.
Phase Adjust the hue for the entire picture area.
–99 to +99 (±0)
R-G, R-B, G-R, G-B, B-R, B-G Finely adjust the color phase for the entire picture
–99 to +99 (±0) area by independently setting each of the factors.
Multi Matrix mode Multi Matrix / Color Correction Select the setting items of the Multi Matrix or the
Selecting multi-matrix setting items of the Color Correction.
correction and color phase
adjustment for the specified
area

44 Useful Functions
PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items Subitems and setting values Contents
Multi Matrix Setting Set to “On” to enable the multi-matrix correction,
Makes settings related to On / Off which allows specific colors to be selected for
multi-matrix correction. saturation correction in a 16-axis hue space.
(Unselectable when “Color Area Indication1) Set to “On” to display a zebra pattern in the areas of
Correction” is selected in the On / Off the specified color for multi-matrix correction.
Multi Matrix mode)
Color Detection2) Execute to detect the target color on the screen for
Execute/Cancel multi-matrix correction.
Axis Specify a color targeted by multi-matrix correction
B / B+ /MG- / MG / MG+ / R / (16-axis mode).
R+ / YL- / YL /YL+ / G- / G /
G+ / CY / CY+ / B-

Recording
Hue Set the the hue of the color targeted by multi-matrix
–99 to +99 (±0) correction for each 16-axis mode.
Saturation Adjust the saturation of the color targeted by multi-
–99 to +99 (±0) matrix correction for each 16-axis mode.
Color Correction Setting Set to “On” to enable the color phase adjustment
Adjusting the color phase in On / Off for a specific area. (Simultaneous adjustment of
a specific area (Unselectable multiple areas is not allowed. You can adjust it for
when “Multi Matrix” is one area only.)
selected in the Multi Matrix Area Detection2) Execute to detect the color in the center of the
mode) screen. The area centering around the detected
Execute/Cancel
color of the range specified by “Target Width”
becomes the target area of Color Correction.
Area Indication1) Set to “On” to display the Zebra 1 pattern for the
On / Off area targeted for Color Correction.

Note
The area where the Zebra 1 pattern is displayed and
the area targeted for Color Correction, may differ.
Target Phase Manually adjust the center color for the area
0 to 359 (130) targeted for Color Correction.

Note
When Area Detection is executed, this setting is
overwritten by the Area Detection result. Perform
fine adjustment with this item as required.
Target Width Set the width of color phase for the area targeted for
0 to 90 (40) Color Correction.
Level Set the saturation for the color in the target area.
–99 to +99 (±0)
Phase Adjust the hue for the color in the target area.
–99 to +99 (±0)

Useful Functions 45
 PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items Subitems and setting values Contents
White Offset White Set to “On” to shift the conversion value for auto
Setting the white balance On / Off white balance in Memory A or B mode and that for
offset and the color auto tracing white in ATW mode to a lower color
temperature of the preset temperature or a higher color temperature.
white Offset<A> Adjust the volume of the offset white (shifting
–99 to +99 (±0) volumes) of the conversion value in Memory A,
Offset<B> Memory B, or ATW mode, respectively.
–99 to +99 (±0)
Offset<ATW>
–99 to +99 (±0)
Preset White Adjust the preset color temperature when Preset
Recording

2100 to 10000 (3200) white balance mode is selected in steps of 100K.

Notes
• Except when the white balance is in Memory A
or B mode or when ATW is active, you cannot
confirm the result of changing the Offset White
and Offset settings on the screen.
• Except when Preset white balance mode is
selected, you cannot confirm the result of
changing the Preset White settings on the screen.
HD Detail Setting Set to “On” to apply the details to the video signal.
Adjusting the details to be On / Off
applied to the picture in HD Level Adjust the detail level.
Mode –99 to +99 (±0)
Frequency Set the center frequency of the details.
–99 to +99 (±0) Setting the center frequency higher decreases the
details, and setting it lower increases the details.
Crispening Adjust the noise-suppression level.
–99 to +99 (±0) When you set it to a higher level, less noise may be
seen, as fine elements of details are deleted leaving
only high-level elements.
When you set it to a lower level, fine elements are
applied while increasing noise.
H/V Ratio Adjust the horizontal-to-vertical ratio of detail
–99 to +99 (±0) elements.
A higher value makes the vertical elements
increased with respect to the horizontal elements.
White Limiter Limit the white details.
–99 to +99 (±0)
Black Limiter Limit the black details.
–99 to +99 (±0)
V DTL Creation Select the source signal to generate vertical details
NAM / Y / G / G+R from among NAM (G or R whichever is higher), Y,
G, and G+R.
Knee APT Level Adjust the knee aperture level (level of details to be
–99 to +99 (±0) applied to the sections above the knee point).

46 Useful Functions
PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items Subitems and setting values Contents
SD Detail Setting Set to “On” to apply the details to the video signal.
Adjusting the details to be On / Off
applied to the picture in SD Level Adjust the detail level.
Mode –99 to +99 (±0)
Frequency Set the center frequency of the details.
–99 to +99 (±0) Setting the center frequency higher decreases the
details, and setting it lower increases the details.
Crispening Adjust the noise-suppression level.
–99 to +99 (±0) When you set it to a higher level, less noise may be
seen, as fine elements of details are deleted leaving
only high-level elements.

Recording
When you set it to a lower level, fine elements are
applied while increasing noise.
H/V Ratio Adjust the horizontal-to-vertical ratio of detail
–99 to +99 (±0) elements.
A higher value makes the vertical elements
increased with respect to the horizontal elements.
White Limiter Limit the white details.
–99 to +99 (±0)
Black Limiter Limit the black details.
–99 to +99 (±0)
V DTL Creation Select the source signal to generate vertical details
NAM / Y / G / G+R from among NAM (G or R whichever is higher), Y,
G, and G+R.
Knee APT Level Adjust the knee aperture level (level of details to be
–99 to +99 (±0) applied to the sections above the knee point).
Skin Tone Detail Setting Set to “On” to enable the detail level adjustment for
Adjusting the details to be On / Off specific color-phase areas.
applied to the areas of a The detail level is uniform over the entire picture
specific color phase with the Off setting.
Level Adjust the skin-tone detail level.
–99 to +99 (±0)
Area Detection2) Select “Execute” to detect the color in the center of
Execute/Cancel the screen. The area centering on the detected color
becomes the target area for Skin Tone Detail
control.
Area Indication1) Set to “On” to display the Zebra 1 pattern for the
On / Off target area for Skin Tone Detail control.
Saturation Adjust the color (saturation) level for Skin Tone
–99 to +99 (±0) Detail control.

Note
When Area Detection is executed, this setting is
automatically returned to 0.
Phase Adjust the center color-phase value for the target
0 to 359 (130) area for Skin Tone Detail control.

Note
When Area Detection is executed, this setting is
automatically changed to the value equivalent to
that of the detected color.

Useful Functions 47
 PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items Subitems and setting values Contents
Width Adjust the width of the color phase of the target
0 to 90 (40) area for Skin Tone Detail control.

Note
When Area Detection is executed, the Width
setting automatically returns to 40.
Aperture Setting Set to “On” to enable aperture correction
Making settings related to On / Off (processing to improve resolution by adding high-
aperture correction frequency aperture signals to the video signal,
which corrects degeneration due to high-frequency
characteristics).
Recording

Level Select the level for the aperture correction.

–99 to +99 (±0)
Knee Setting Set to “On” to compress the high-luminance area of
Adjusting the knee level On / Off the picture.

Notes
Knee is fixed and cannot be changed in the
following cases:
• When Gamma is set to HG1 to 4
• When the electronic shutter is in slow shutter
mode
• When EX SLS is active
Auto Knee Set to “On” to automatically set the best knee
On / Off conditions according to the luminance level of the
picture.
With “Off” the knee conditions can be manually
adjusted independently of the luminance level of
the picture.
Point Set the knee point when Auto Knee is “Off.”
50 to 109 (90)
Slope Set the knee slope (volume of compression) when
–99 to +99 (±0) Auto Knee is “Off.”
Knee SAT Set to “On” to enable the knee saturation
On / Off adjustment (level for the area over the knee point).
Knee SAT Level Adjust the knee saturation level for the area over
–99 to +99 (±0) the knee point.
White Clip Setting Turns white clipping adjustment on or off.
On / Off
Level Specifies the white clip level.
When “Country” is set to other
than “PAL Area”
90.0%~109.0% (108.0%)
When “Country” is set to “PAL
Area”
90.0%~109.0% (105.0%)
Gamma Level Adjust the gamma compensation level.
Adjusting the gamma –99 to +99 (±0)
compensation level and Select3) Select the type of reference curve for gamma
selecting the gamma curve compensation.
STD1 to STD6 / HG1 to HG4
(HD: STD5, SD: STD4)

48 Useful Functions
PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items Subitems and setting values Contents
Black –99 to +99 (±0) Adjust the master black level.
Adjusting the black
Black Gamma –99 to +99 (HD: ±0, SD: -16) Adjust the level of black gamma function that
Adjusting the black gamma emphasizes only the dark areas of the picture to
level clear the tones or on the contrary de-emphasizes it
to reduce noise.
Low Key SAT –99 to +99 (±0) Adjust the level of the low key saturation to
Adjusting the low key heighten the colors only in the dark areas of the
saturation picture or pale them to reduce noise.
Copy Execute / Cancel Select “Execute” to copy.
Copying a picture profile

Recording
PP Data Store Select “Execute” to store a picture profile on an
Writing/loading a picture Execute / Cancel SxS memory card.
profile Recall Select “Execute” to load a picture profile from an
Execute / Cancel SxS memory card.
Reset Execute / Cancel Select “Execute” to reset.
Resetting a picture profile

1) The Area Indication “On”/“Off” setting is common to 3) Available gamma curves from “Select” in “Gamma”
all picture profiles PP1 to PP6. (STD: Standard gamma, HG: Hyper gamma)
STD1: A gamma table equivalent to an SD camcorder.
2) To execute “Color Detection” of “Multi Matrix” or
STD2: A gamma table with ×4.5 gain.
“Area Detection” of “Color Correction”/”Skin Tone
STD3: A gamma table with ×3.5 gain.
Detail”
STD4: A gamma table equivalent to the SMPTE-240M
1. Select “Color Detection” or “Area standard.
Detection.” STD5: A gamma table equivalent to the ITU-R709
standard.
A square marker that indicates the detection
STD6: A gamma table with ×5.0 gain.
area appears in the center of the screen, and
HG1: A gamma table for turning 325% D-range input
“Execute” and “Cancel” are displayed below. into 100% output.
2. Select “Execute.” HG2: A gamma table for turning 460% D-range input
Color-phase detection in the marker area is into 100% output.
performed. HG3: A gamma table for turning 325% D-range input
When detection successfully ends, a into 109% output.
completion message is displayed then the HG4: A gamma table for turning 460% D-range input
into 109% output.
screen is restored.
With Multi Matrix, the target color of multi-
matrix correction is changed to the color
detected by “Color Detection,” and the Area
Indication (zebra pattern) appears on the
screen.
With Skin Tone Detail, the target area for the
adjustment is changed to the area centering
around the color detected by “Area
Detection,” and the Area Indication (zebra
pattern) appears on the screen.
If detection fails, an error message appears,
then the precious screen is restored.

Useful Functions 49
 Note
Deleting Clips
Values for “Clock Set” and “Hours Meter” of the
OTHERS menu are not stored.
While standing by to record, the Last Clip DEL
function for deleting the last recorded clip and the
All Clips DEL function for deleting all clips from
Storing the Setup file
an SxS memory card are available. To use an SxS memory card
For clip deletion on the thumbnail screen, see Only one setup file—designated with the file
“Deleting Clips” on page 75. name “SETUP.SUF”—can be stored on one SxS
memory card.
To delete using the assignable button
1 Insert a memory card on which you
Assign the Last Clip DEL function to one of the wish to store the setup file to a card slot.
assignable buttons (page 37) in advance.
Recording

Check that the corresponding memory card

Press the assignable button to which you have
icon is displayed on the screen. If a memory
assigned “Last Clip DEL,” and select “Execute”
card in the other slot is selected, press the
to delete the last recorded clip from the SxS
SLOT SELECT button to switch.
memory card.
2 Select “Store” in “Camera Data” (page
To delete using the Setup menu 101) of the OTHERS menu, then select
Select “Last Clip DEL” in “Clip” (page 106) of “Execute.”
the OTHERS menu, select “Execute,” then select An in-progress message is displayed during
“Execute” again to delete the last recorded clip writing. When writing is completed, a completion
from the SxS memory card. message is displayed.
Note Notes
When Clip Continuous Recording is set to “On,” “Last • If a setup file already exists on the memory card you
Clip DEL” cannot be selected. specified in Step 1, a message to confirm whether to
overwrite the file is displayed.
Deleting clips collectively • If there is not sufficient space on the memory card, an
error message is displayed.
Select “All Clips DEL” in “Clip” (page 106) of To use a USB flash drive (in UDF and exFAT)
the OTHERS menu, select “Execute,” then select Connect the formatted USB flash drive to the
“Execute” again to delete all the clips from the external device connector (page 24).
SxS memory card. Select “All Save(USB)” > “Execute” in step 2.
Notes
• If the SxS memory card contains clips of both of HD Retrieving the Setup file
Mode and SD Mode, only the clips of the currently
selected mode are deleted. To use an SxS memory card
• Clips with the OK mark (page 36) cannot be deleted if When you retrieve the stored setup file, the
FAT is selected for the file system. If UDF or exFAT camcorder settings are changed according to the
is selected, clips set to “Lock Clip” (page 72) cannot be
deleted. file.

1 Insert the memory card on which you

Storing/Retrieving the Setting stored the setup file into a card slot.
Data Check that the corresponding memory card
icon is displayed on the screen. If a memory
You can store all the menu settings (including card in the other slot is selected, press the
picture profiles) as a setup file on an SxS memory SLOT SELECT button to switch.
card or a USB flash drive.
By retrieving the stored setup file, the proper 2 Select “Recall” in “Camera Data” (page
setup condition can be immediately obtained. 101) in the OTHERS menu, then select
“Execute.”

50 Useful Functions
An in-progress message is displayed during data • Finnish
reading. When the read-out is completed, a
Notes
completion message is displayed, indicating that
the camcorder settings have been changed • If you define clip and shot mark names in languages
other than those listed above, they may not be
according to the setup file. displayed on the LCD monitor/EVF screen.
To use a USB flash drive (in UDF and exFAT) • If you define clip and shot mark names in French,
Dutch, or Finnish, some characters are displayed in a
Connect the formatted USB flash drive to the different but similar font.
external device connector (page 24).
Select “All Load(USB)” > “Execute” in step 2. Loading a Planning Metadata file
Resetting to the standard values To record planning metadata together with clips,
it is necessary to load a planning metadata file
The current camcorder settings you made through into the camcorder’s memory in advance.
various menu and button operations can be

Recording
To use an SxS memory card
collectively returned to the standard statuses
Insert the SxS memory card with the planning
(factory settings) by executing “All Reset” of the
metadata file (.xml) saved to the directory below
OTHERS menu.
into the camcorder’s card slot, then select and
load the file via “Load / Slot(A)” or “Load /
Planning Metadata Slot(B)” in “Plan.Metadata” (page 108) of the
OTHERS menu.
Planning metadata is information about shooting UDF: General/Sony/Planning
and recording plans, recorded in an XML file. exFAT: XDROOT/General/Sony/Planning
FAT: BPAV/General/Sony/Planning
Example of a planning metadata file
To use a USB flash drive (in UDF and exFAT)
Set “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” in “Network” (page
109) of the OTHERS menu to “USB A” in
advance.
Note
“USB A” cannot be selected when “Format” in “System”
(page 105) of the OTHERS menu is set to the following
settings.
• XAVC-L50 1080/59.94P, 50P
• XAVC-L35 1080/59.94P, 50P

1 Connect a USB flash drive formatted

with the FAT32 file system to the
You can shoot using clip names and shot mark
external device connector (page 24).
names defined in advance in a planning metadata
file. A file list appears.
This camcorder can display clip names and shot Note
mark names defined in the following languages: The file list displays up to 64 files.
• English Even if the total number of planning metadata files
• Chinese is 64 or less, all of the planning metadata files may
• German not appear if the directory where they are located on
the USB flash drive (General/Sony/Planning)
• French contains 512 or more files.
• Italian
• Spanish 2 Using the up/down/left/right buttons or
• Dutch the jog dial, select the file which you
• Portuguese want to load in the file list, then press
• Swedish the SEL/SET button or the jog dial.
• Norwegian
• Danish

Useful Functions 51
 Confirming the detailed information in planning Example of clip name strings
metadata Use a text editor to modify the description for the
After loading a planning metadata file into <Title> tag.
memory of the camcorder, you can check the The shaded fields in the example are clip name
details of the file, such as the filename, time and strings. “Typhoon” is described in ASCII format
date of file creation, and the titles specified in the (up to 44 characters).
file. “Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo” is described in UTF-8
Select “Properties” in “Plan.Metadata” (page format (up to 44 bytes).
108) of the OTHERS menu, then select Here, “sp” indicates a space, and 3 indicates a
“Execute.” carriage return.
Using the Wi-Fi connection
When connecting the unit with a computer via <?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="
UTF-8"?>3
Wi-Fi, the file transmission can be done accessing
<PlanningMetadataspxmlns="http://
Recording

the unit’s Web menu from a computer.

xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
1 Launch the browser and input http:// planningmetadata"spassignId="
<camcorder’s IP address> (page 109) in P0001"spcreationDate="
the address bar. 2011-08-20T17:00:00+09:00"sp
lastUpdate="
Example: When the IP address is
2011-09-28T10:30:00+09:00"sp
192.168.1.10, input http://192.168.1.10/ in
version="1.00">3
the address bar.
<PropertiessppropertyId="
2 Input the user name and password, then assignment"spupdate="
2011-09-28T10:30:00+09:00"sp
click OK.
modifiedBy="Chris">3
User name: admin <TitlespusAscii=" Typhoon"sp
Password: (your unit’s model in lowercase; xml:lang="en"> Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo
pxw-x200, as appropriate) </Title>3
Clearing the loaded planning metadata </Properties>3
To clear the planning data loaded in the </PlanningMetadata>3
camcorder’s memory, proceed as follows:
Notes
Select “Clear” in “Plan.Metadata” (page 108) of
the OTHERS menu, then select “Execute.” • When you create a file, enter each statement as a single
line by breaking a line with a CRLF only after the last
character of the line, and do not enter spaces except
Defining a clip name in Planning where specified with “sp.”
• A string of up to 44 bytes (or 44 characters) is valid as
Metadata a clip name. If a UTF-8-format string exceeds 44 bytes,
The following two types of clip name strings can the string up to the 44th byte is used as the clip name.
If only a string in ASCII format is specified, the
be written in a planning metadata file. ASCII-format name up to the 44th characters is used as
• ASCII-format name, which is displayed on the the clip name. When neither the ASCII-format name
EVF screen string nor UTF-8-format name string is valid, a clip
• UTF-8-format name, which is actually name in the standard format is used.
registered as the clip name Using a clip name defined in planning metadata
Load a planning metadata file that contains the
You can select the type for displaying the clip clip name into memory of the camcorder, then
name with “Clip Name Disp” in “Plan.Metadata” select “Plan” for “Auto Naming” in “Clip” (page
(page 108) of the OTHERS menu. 106) of the OTHERS menu.
When you specify a clip name in planning Clip names are generated by adding an
metadata, the name is displayed under the underscore (_) and a 5-digit serial number (00001
operation status indication on the EVF screen. to 99999).
Example: Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00001,
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00002, ...

52 Useful Functions
 Notes character of the line, and do not enter spaces except
where specified with “sp,” except within shot mark name
• If the serial number reaches 99999, it returns to 00001 strings.
upon the next recording.
• When you load another planning metadata file, the 5-
digit serial number returns to 00001. Copying Planning Metadata files
collectively
Defining Shot Mark names in Planning You can copy planning metadata files stored in
Metadata the General folder on an SxS memory card
When you record shot mark 1 or shot mark 2, you collectively to another SxS memory card.
can apply a name to the shot mark, using a string Select “General Files” in “Copy All” (page 107)
defined in planning metadata. of the OTHERS menu.

Example of shot mark name strings

Use a text editor to modify the description for the

Recording
<Meta name> tag.
The shaded fields in the example are shot mark
name strings.
Names can be either in ASCII format (up to 32
characters) or UTF-8 format (up to 16 characters).
Here, “sp” indicates a space and 3 indicates a
carriage return.
Note
If a name string contains even one non-ASCII character,
the maximum length of that string is limited to 16
characters.

<?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="
UTF-8"?>3
<PlanningMetadata xmlns="http://
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
planningmetadata"spassignId="
H00123"spcreationDate="
2011-04-15T08:00:00Z"splastUpdate="
2011-04-15T15:00:00Z"spversion=
"1.00">3
<PropertiessppropertyId=
"assignment"spclass="original"sp
update="2011-04-15T15:00:00Z"sp
modifiedBy="Chris">3
<TitlespusAscii="Football
Game"spxml:lang="en">
Football Game 15/04/2011
</Title>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark1"sp
content=" Goal "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark2"sp
content=" Shoot "/>3
</Properties>3
</PlanningMetadata>3
Note
When you create a file, enter each statement as a single
line by breaking a line with a CRLF only after the last

Useful Functions 53
 Checking the Remaining Time
Proxy Recording
The remaining time of an SD card can be checked
on the LCD monitor/EVF screen (page 98).
You can record proxy data on an SD card
simultaneously while recording on an SxS 1 In “Network” (page 109) of the
memory card.
OTHERS menu, specify “Wi-
Fi&Proxy/USB” then select “Wi-
Usable SD Cards Fi&Proxy.”

SDHC memory card* (Speed Class: Higher than 2 Insert the SD card into the slot with the
4, Capacity: Up to 32 GB) label facing right.
* Indicated as “SD card” in this Operating Instructions. To use media formatted with this camcorder in
Recording

the slots of other devices

Make a backup of the media, then format it using
Formatting an SD Card the other device.
When you use an SD card with this camcorder, it
must be formatted using the format function of
Performing Proxy Recording
this camcorder.
It is also necessary to format an SD card if a 1 Set “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” in “Network”
caution message is displayed when you mount it.
(page 109) of the OTHERS menu to
1 In “Network” (page 109) of the “Wi-Fi&Proxy.”
OTHERS menu, specify “Wi-
2 Insert the SD card into the slot with the
Fi&Proxy/USB” then select “Wi-
label facing right.
Fi&Proxy.”
3 Start recording.
2 Insert the SD card into the slot with the
When the recording on an SxS memory card
label facing right.
is stopped, proxy recording is also stopped.
3 In “Proxy File” (page 109) of the Memo
OTHERS menu, specify “Format SD “Rec2-P” appears on the LCD monitor/EVF screen
Card” then select “Execute.” during proxy recording.
The in-progress message and progress status Notes
are displayed. When formatting is complete,
• The proxy recording does not work when “Format” in
a completion message is displayed. Press the “System” of the OTHERS menu is set to the following
SEL/SET dial to hide the message. settings.
—exFAT:
Notes XAVC-L50 1080/59.94P, 50P
• All the data is erased when an SD card is formatted, XAVC-L35 1080/59.94P, 50P
and the data cannot be restored. —UDF, exFAT:
• Use an SD card that is formatted in FAT32. HD422 50/720/29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
HQ 1280×720/23.98P
DVCAM 59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 25P
IMX50 59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 25P
—FAT:
SP 1440×1080/23.98P
HQ 1280×720/29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
DVCAM 59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 25P
• The proxy recording does not work during Interval
Recording, Frame Recording, Picture Cache
Recording, Clip Continuous Recording, and Slow &
Quick Motion.
• When performing proxy recording, set Interval
Recording, Frame Recording, Picture Cache

54 Proxy Recording
 Recording, Clip Continuous Recording, and Slow &
Quick Motion to off, and set “Proxy” of the CAMERA
SET menu to “On” (page 88).
• Data integrity is not guaranteed if the power is turned
Connecting to Other
off or an SD card is removed while it is being accessed.
Data on the SD card may be destroyed. The camcorder
Device via Wireless LAN
does not have the salvage function that can recover the
damaged material. Be sure that the camcorder is turned You can make a wireless LAN connection
off when you remove the SD card from the camcorder.
Be sure that the ACCESS lamp of the used SD card is between the camcorder and a device such as a
turned off when you turn the camcorder off. smartphone or tablet by attaching the supplied
• Make sure that the SD card does not pop out when IFU-WLM3 USB wireless LAN module.
inserting or removing it.
Notes
• You cannot use a USB wireless LAN module other
Changing the Proxy Recording than the IFU-WLM3.

Recording
Setting • You cannot make a wireless LAN connection when
“Format” in “System” is set to the following settings.
XAVC-L50 1080/59.94P, 50P
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94P, 50P
Setting the picture size
Select the picture size with “Size” in “Proxy File” Making a wireless LAN connection between a
(page 109) of the OTHERS menu. device and the camcorder enables you to do the
following.
• Remote operation via a wireless LAN
About the Recorded File You can control the camcorder from a
smartphone, tablet, or computer that is
The file system of the recorded file is FAT32, and connected to the camcorder via the wireless
the file extension is “.mp4.” LAN.
The timecode is also recorded simultaneously. • File transferring via a wireless LAN
You can transfer a proxy file (low resolution)
that is recorded on an SD card in the camcorder
Storage Destination of the
or original file (high resolution) that is recorded
Recorded File by the camcorder to the server via the wireless
LAN.
The recorded file is stored under the “/PRIVATE/ • Video/audio streaming via a wireless LAN
PXROOT/Clip” directory. You can create a stream (H.264/AAC-LC
compression) from the video/audio of a
camcorder, and watch the video/audio
About the File Name
streaming by using the “Content Browser
The file name is same as the clip name that is Mobile” application that is installed on a
recorded on an SxS memory card. smartphone, tablet, or computer via the wireless
When “Match Clip Name” is set to “Off,” the file LAN.
name generated as the timecode at the start of “Content Browser Mobile” application
recording. (Example: When the recording starts at You can operate the camcorder remotely while
14:30:20 05 frame, the file name will be streaming the audio/video of the camcorder, and
“14_30_20_05.mp4.”) If there is the file that was perform the settings of the camcorder by using the
recorded at same time, the camcorder does not “Content Browser Mobile” application.
overwrite it and the serial number is added to the For details about the “Content Browser Mobile”
new file name. application, contact your Sony dealer or a Sony
service representative.

Connecting to Other Device via Wireless LAN 55

 Compatible devices Connecting with the Wireless LAN
You can use a smartphone, tablet, or computer for Access Point Mode
setting and operating the camcorder. Compatible
devices, operating systems, and browsers are as The camcorder works as an access point, and
follows. connects to a device via a wireless LAN.

Device OS Browser
Smartphone Android 4.3 Chrome Computer
iOS 7 Safari Smartphone/
tablet
Tablet Android 4.3 Chrome
iOS 7 Safari
Computer Microsoft Internet Explorer
Windows 7 SP1/ 11
Recording

Microsoft
Windows 8.1
Mac OS10.7 Safari
Mac OS10.8

Attaching the IFU-WLM3

1 Open the cover of the external device
connector, then attach the IFU-WLM3.
Note
Attach/remove the IFU-WLM3 while the camcorder is Connecting to an NFC-compatible device
turned off. with one-touch operation
You can connect the camcorder to an NFC-
compatible device with one-touch operation by
using the NFC function.

1 Start “Settings” on the device, select

“Other Settings,” then mark the “NFC”
checkbox.

2 Turn the camcorder on.

3 Set “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” in “Network”

(page 109) of the OTHERS menu to
“Wi-Fi&Proxy.”
Note
It may take time (for about 1 minute) until the
wireless LAN function is activated.
The radio wave intensity indication on the LCD/
EVF screen flashes. Wait until the radio wave
intensity indication stops flashing.

56 Connecting to Other Device via Wireless LAN

4 Activate the NFC function. The “AP” indication appears on the LCD
Select “Execute” for “NFC” in “Network” monitor/EVF screen.
(page 109) of the OTHERS menu, or press
the assignable button to which “NFC” is
4 Select “Execute” for “WPS” in
assigned. “Network” (page 109) of the OTHERS
menu.
5 Hold the smartphone near the
camcorder. 5 Select “Network Setting” > “Wi-Fi
Setting” on the device, then set “Wi-Fi”
The smartphone is connected to the
to on.
camcorder and “Content Browser Mobile”
starts. 6 Select the camcorder’s SSID from the
The “AP” indication appears on the LCD
SSID list in “Wi-Fi Network” on the
monitor/EVF screen when smartphone is
device, then select “WPS Push Button”

Recording
connected to the camcorder.
in “Option” on the device.
Notes
• The operation method differs depending on the
device.
• For the SSID and password of the camcorder,
check “SSID&Key” in “Network” (page 109) of
the OTHERS menu.

7 Start the browser on the device, then

access “http://192.168.1.1:8080/
index.html.”
The screen for inputting “User Name” and
“Password” appears.
For the user name and password of the access
Notes
authentication, check “User Name” and
• Cancel the sleep or screen lock function of the “Password” in “Network” (page 109) of the
smartphone in advance.
• Hold the device near to the camcorder without moving OTHERS menu.
the device until “Content Browser Mobile” starts (1 to
2 seconds). 8 Input the user name and password, then
select “OK.”
Connecting to a WPS-compatible device
You can connect the camcorder to a WPS- Connecting by inputting an SSID and
compatible device by using the WPS function. password on a device
You can connect the camcorder to a device by
1 Turn the camcorder on.
inputting an SSID and password on a device.
2 Set “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” in “Network” 1 Turn the camcorder on.
(page 109) of the OTHERS menu to
“Wi-Fi&Proxy.” 2 Set “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” in “Network”
Note (page 109) of the OTHERS menu to
“Wi-Fi&Proxy.”
It may take time (for about 1 minute) until the
wireless LAN function is activated. Note
The radio wave intensity indication on the LCD/
EVF screen flashes. Wait until the radio wave It may take time (for about 1 minute) until the
intensity indication stops flashing. wireless LAN function is activated.
The radio wave intensity indication on the LCD/
3 Set “Wi-Fi Func. Mode” in “Network” EVF screen flashes. Wait until the radio wave
intensity indication stops flashing.
(page 109) of the OTHERS menu to
“Access Point.”

Connecting to Other Device via Wireless LAN 57

 3 Set “Wi-Fi Func. Mode” in “Network”
(page 109) of the OTHERS menu to Connecting with the Wireless LAN
“Access Point.” Station Mode
The “AP” indication appears on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen. The camcorder connects to an existing access
point of the wireless LAN as a client. The
4 Select “Network Setting” > “Wi-Fi camcorder and device connect via the access
Setting” on the device, then set “Wi-Fi” point.
to on.
Computer
5 Connect the device to the camcorder by Smartphone/
tablet
selecting the camcorder’s SSID from
the SSID list in “Wi-Fi Network” and
Recording

inputting the password on the device.

For the SSID and password of the camcorder,
check “SSID&Key” in “Network” (page
109) of the OTHERS menu.
Note
The operation method differs depending on the Access
device. point

6 Start the browser on the device, then

access “http://192.168.1.1:8080/
index.html.”
The screen for inputting “User Name” and
“Password” appears.
For the user name and password of the access
authentication, check “User Name” and
“Password” in “Network” (page 109) of the
OTHERS menu.
Connecting to the access point with the
7 Input the user name and password, then
WPS function
select “OK.”
If the access point is compatible with the WPS
function, you can connect to the access point with
simple settings. If the access point is not
compatible with the WPS function, see “To
connect to the access point in the station mode
without the WPS function” (page 64).

1 Turn the access point on.

2 Turn the camcorder on.

3 Set “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” in “Network”

(page 109) of the OTHERS menu to
“Wi-Fi&Proxy.”
Note
It may take time (for about 1 minute) until the
wireless LAN function is activated.

58 Connecting to Other Device via Wireless LAN

 The radio wave intensity indication on the LCD/
EVF screen flashes. Wait until the radio wave
intensity indication stops flashing. Uploading a File
4 Set “Wi-Fi Func. Mode” in “Network”
(page 109) of the OTHERS menu to You can upload a proxy file or original file that is
“Station.” recorded on the camcorder to the server on the
Internet via an access point.
Note
It may take time (for about 1 minute) until the
camcorder is in the station mode. Preparations
5 Select “Execute” for “WPS” in To register the server for uploading
“Network” (page 109) of the OTHERS Register the server for uploading in advance.
menu. For details about registering the server, see

Recording
“Register the server for uploading” (page 65).
6 Press the WPS button of the access
point.
For the operation of the WPS button, refer to Selecting the File and Uploading
the operating instructions of the access point.
When the connection is completed, the radio Upload the file that is recorded on an SD card, or
wave intensity indication on the LCD/EVF the original file that is recorded on an SxS
screen lights at a strength of more than 1. memory card, to the server.

Note
Uploading a proxy file on an SD card
If the connection fails, perform steps from step 1
again.
1 Connect a device to the camcorder via a
7 Connect the device to the access point. wireless LAN, start the browser on the
For connecting, refer to the operating device, then access the camcorder from
instructions of the device. the browser (page 55).

8 Start the browser on the device, then 2 Display the file list screen to select the
access to “http://<IP address that the file.
access point assigns to the Touch “ ” > “Media Info” > “SD Card.”
camcorder>:8080/index.html.” The “SD Card,” “Slot A,” or “Slot B” screen
For the camcorder’s IP address, check “IP appears.
Address” in “Network” (page 109) of the Example: “SD Card” screen
OTHERS menu.
The screen for inputting “User Name” and
“Password” appears.
For the user name and password of the access
authentication, check “User Name” and
“Password” in “Network” (page 109) of the
OTHERS menu.

9 Input the user name and password, then

select “OK.”
The Web menu of the camcorder appears on
the browser. For details, see “About the Web
Menu” (page 62).

Uploading a File 59
 3 Select the file. Example: “SD Card” screen
Select the file by touching the file. To cancel,
touch the file again.
You can check the file by double touching
the file to play back (SD card only).

4 Touch “Transfer.”
The server that you set to the default server at
“Default Server” in “Register the server for
uploading” (page 65) appears.
To change the server, touch the server to 3 Select the file.
display the server list, then select a server. Select the file by touching the file. To cancel,
Input the directory for the server to touch the file again.
Recording

“Directory” if necessary. You can check the file by double touching

the file to play back (SD card only).

4 Touch “Transfer.”
The server that you set to the default server at
“Default Server” in “Register the server for
uploading” (page 65) appears.
To change the server, touch a server to
display the server list, then select the server.
Input the directory for the server to
5 Touch “Transfer.” “Directory” if necessary.
The camcorder starts uploading the selected
file.
To cancel uploading, touch “Cancel.”

Uploading an original file on an SxS

memory card

1 Connect a device to the camcorder via a

wireless LAN, start the browser on the
terminal device, then access the
5 Touch “Transfer.”
camcorder from the browser (page 55). The camcorder starts uploading the selected
file.
2 Display the file list screen to select the To cancel uploading, touch “Cancel.”
file.
Touch “ ” > “Media Info” > “Slot A” (for Checking the file uploading
a memory card in the slot A) or “Slot B” (for You can check the upload status on the “Job List”
a memory card in the slot B). screen that is displayed by touching “Job List” on
The “SD Card,” “Slot A,” or “Slot B” screen the “SD Card,” “Slot A,” or “Slot B” screen (page
appears. 66).

60 Uploading a File
 For Tablet
Using the Wi-Fi Remote
Commander
When a Wi-Fi connection is established between
a device such as smartphone, tablet, PC, etc., and
the camcorder, the Wi-Fi remote commander
appears on the device screen and the device can
be used as a remote commander.
You can start/stop recording, adjust iris/focus/
zoom, etc., with a Wi-Fi connected device. This
function is useful for setting the camcorder in a
remote place, such as the top of a crane, etc. To display the Wi-Fi remote commander

Recording
Notes To display the Wi-Fi remote commander on a
• When iris is not set to auto, “IRIS” slider operation and device screen, settings are required on both the
ON/OFF setting of “Auto IRIS” are not available. device and camcorder.
• When the focus ring is pulled rearward, “FOCUS”
slider operation and ON/OFF setting of “Auto Focus” Camcorder settings
are not available.
• When the ZOOM switch is set to MANUAL, “ZOOM”
slider operation is not available.
1 Set “Wi-Fi Remote” in “Network”
(page 109) of the OTHERS menu to
The displays of Wi-Fi remote commander “On.”
For smartphone Device settings
Set the smartphone, tablet, PC, etc., to be used as
the Wi-Fi remote commander.

1 Make a Wi-Fi connection between the

device and camcorder (page 55).

2 Launch the browser and input http://

<camcorder’s IP address> (refer to “IP
Address” in “Network” (page 109) of
the OTHERS menu)/rm.html.
Example: When the IP address is
192.168.1.10, input “http://192.168.1.10/
rm.html” in the address bar.
The Wi-Fi remote commander will appear on
the device screen when the Wi-Fi connection
is established.
Thereafter operate the camcorder as shown
on the screen of the Wi-Fi connected device.
The REC button becomes unavailable when
the Lock switch is dragged to the right.
Notes
• Depending on the device, the Wi-Fi remote
commander may not appear properly on the device’s
screen even though you input “http://<camcorder’s IP
address> (page 109)/rm.html” in the address bar. In
this case, input “rms.html” for a smartphone or
“rmt.html” for a tablet at the end of the address to
display the Wi-Fi remote commander properly.
• The Wi-Fi remote commander on the device’s screen
may no longer match the actual status of the camcorder

Uploading a File 61
 in the following cases. When this happens, refresh the
browser on the device.
—when the camcorder is restarted while the Wi-Fi
connection is established
About the Web Menu
—when the camcorder is controlled directly while
the Wi-Fi connection is established The Web menu of the camcorder appears by
—when the device is reconnected
—when you operate forward/backward on the
accessing the camcorder from the browser of a
device’s browser. device that is connected to the camcorder via a
• If the Wi-Fi signal is poor, the Wi-Fi remote wireless LAN. You can perform the settings for the
commander may not work properly. wireless function or the operation of the file transfer.

Initial screen
When connecting the camcorder and device, and
accessing the camcorder from the browser on the
Recording

device, the “SD Card” screen in “Media Info” of

the camcorder appears on the browser.

About the setting menu

The setting menu appears by touching at the
upper left of the screen. Touch the item that you
want to set.
“Device Status”
• “Short Cut”
“Media”: Short-cut button for the “SD Card”
screen (page 59)
“Format”: Short-cut button for the “Format”
screen (page 63)
• “Status”
“Wireless Module”: Status indication for proxy
recording
“Recording”: Recording a proxy file
“Stop”: Recording is stopped
“Remain”: SD card remaining space indication
“Warning/Error”: Warning/Error indication
(“Wxx-xxx” is a warning number. “Exx-xxx” is
an error number (page 141))
• “Network”
“Wireless LAN IP Address”: Camcorder’s IP
address
• “Hardware”
“Serial Number”: Camcorder’s serial number
“OSS Information”: Copyright information

62 About the Web Menu

“Settings” Audio
Displays the screen for the settings of the • AAC-LC compression
camcorder. • Sampling frequency: 48 kHz
• “Wireless Module” • Bit rate: 128 kbps for Stereo
“Format”: Format settings (page 63)
• “Wireless LAN”
“Station Settings”: Wireless LAN settings
(page 64)
“Status”: Status for the wireless LAN settings
(page 64)
• “Upload Settings”
Upload settings (page 65)
Note

Recording
When the “Settings” screen is displayed, the desired
setting screen appears by touching the following. “Size” (“Streaming”)
Set the size and bit rate of the video for the
stream.
“640 × 360”: 3 Mbps (VBR)
“480 × 270”: 1 Mbps (VBR)
“480 × 270”: 0.5 Mbps (VBR)
“Size” (“Proxy File recording”)
Set the size and bit rate of the video for the proxy
file.
“1280 × 720”: 9 Mbps (VBR)
“640 × 360”: 3 Mbps (VBR)
“Media Info” “480 × 270”: 1 Mbps (VBR)
Displays the screen for displaying the status of the “480 × 270”: 0.5 Mbps (VBR)
media, or selecting the file that is uploaded (page
Note
59).
• “SD Card”: Media that is inserted into the This bit rate is the average value. The actual bit rate may
be more than the average value.
PROXY SD slot of the camcorder.
• “Slot A”: Media that is inserted into card slot A “Frame Rate”
of the camcorder. Displays the frame rate of the video.
• “Slot B”: Media that is inserted into card slot B “23.98 fps”: 23.975 fps
of the camcorder. “25 fps”: 25 fps
“29.97 fps”: 29.97 fps
“Job List”
“50 fps”: 50 fps
Displays the screen for managing the uploaded
“59.94 fps”: 59.94 fps
files (page 66).
Note
“Cam Remote Control”
Displays the Wi-Fi remote commander (page 61). “24 fps” is not supported.
“Bit Rate”
Displays the bit rate of the video.
Format Settings “9 Mbps (VBR)”: 1280 × 720
“3 Mbps (VBR)”: 640 × 360
You can set the format of the proxy file that is “1 Mbps (VBR)”: 480 × 270
recorded on the SD card of the camcorder or the “0.5 Mbps (VBR)”: 480 × 270
format for the stream that is played on a device.
“Audio Channel Select”
Video Selects the audio channel for recording.
• XAVC Proxy (AVC/H.264 Main Profile, 4:2:0 “Ch-1 & Ch-2”: Audio of the channel 1 and 2
Long GOP) (default setting)
• Size is selected in the following settings. “Ch-3 & Ch-4”: Audio of the channel 3 and 4

About the Web Menu 63

 Note Input the primary DNS server for the access
point. This setting is available only when
The left of the item name is played on the left channel,
the right of the item name is played on the right channel. “DHCP” is set to “Off.”
“Secondary DNS Server”
Input the secondary DNS server for the access
Wireless LAN Settings (Station point. This setting is available only when
Settings) “DHCP” is set to “Off.”
“Submit”
You can perform the settings for connecting to a
wireless LAN. Confirms the wireless LAN settings.
To connect to the access point in the station
mode without the WPS function

1 Connect the device to the camcorder in

Recording

the access point mode (page 56).

2 Set the items on the “Station Settings”

screen.
Perform settings in accordance with the
access point settings.
For details about the access point settings,
“Host Name”
see the operating instructions of the access
Displays the host name of the camcorder. (Cannot point.
be changed).
“SSID” 3 Touch “Submit.”
Displays the SSID that is selected at “Access The set items are confirmed.
Point.”
“Key”
4 Set the camcorder’s wireless LAN
Input the password for the access point. operation mode to the station mode by
setting “Wi-Fi Func. Mode” in
“DHCP” “Network” of the OTHERS menu to
Set the DHCP setting.
“Station.”
When you set to “On,” the IP address is assigned
to the camcorder automatically. The camcorder starts connecting in the
To assign the IP address to the camcorder station mode. Access the camcorder from the
manually, set to “Off.” device by performing procedure from step 8
of “Connecting to the access point with the
“IP Address” WPS function” (page 58).
Input the IP address of the camcorder. This
setting is available only when “DHCP” is set to
Checking the wireless LAN settings
“Off.”
Display the screen for checking the wireless LAN
“Subnet mask”
settings by touching “Wireless LAN” > “Status.”
Input the subnet mask of the camcorder. This
The displayed items differ depending on the
setting is available only when “DHCP” is set to
wireless LAN mode of the camcorder.
“Off.”
“Gateway”
Input the default gateway for the access point.
This setting is available only when “DHCP” is set
to “Off.”
“Primary DNS Server”

64 About the Web Menu

Access point mode the server that is set to the default server at
“Upload Setting” after recording.

“Sony Ci” is set for the server as the default.

Sony Ci is “Media Cloud Services” that is
provided by Sony. You can upload files to the
Sony cloud service, Sony Ci.
Note
To use Sony Ci, registration is required.
For more details, please visit www.SonyMCS.com/
wireless
Station mode To register “Sony Ci”

Recording
1 Make sure that “Sony Ci” is displayed
on the “Upload Settings” screen, then
touch “Edit.”
The setting screen for Sony Ci appears.

2 Input the user name in “User” and

password in “Password.”
For more details, please visit
www.SonyMCS.com/wireless

3 Touch “Link.”
Upload Settings After a few moments, the completion
message appears.
You can register the server for uploading a proxy
file or an original file that is recorded on the Note
camcorder, or change the server setting that is “Link” is the operation to associate the user with the
registered. camcorder. To perform “Link,” you need to connect
the camcorder to the Internet.
Delete the registered
server. Change the
4 Touch “OK.”
server settings. Note
Select the server.
After registering with Sony Ci, “Unlink” will
appear on the setting screen. If you touch “Unlink,”
the current user account will be unlinked, and you
can link with a different user account.

Register the server for uploading

The setting screen appears by touching “Create
New.”

Turn the auto upload

function on/off. Register the server.

“Auto Upload On/Off”

When “Auto Upload On/Off” is set to “On” and
the camcorder is connected to the Internet, the
camcorder automatically uploads a proxy file to

About the Web Menu 65

 The setting is applied by touching “OK.” To
cancel, touch “Cancel.” Checking the File Transferring
“Default Server” (Job List)
When you set to “On,” the server takes priority
for displaying the server name on the list when You can check the list of the files to be uploaded,
uploading. the file that is being uploaded, cancel or start the
file upload, and delete the file from the file list.
“Display Name” The camcorder is compatible with the FTP
Input the server name that is displayed on the list. resume function (re-upload function for a file
“Service” whose transfer was suspended).
Displays the server type.
“FTP”: FTP server
“Host Name”
Recording

Input the address of the server.

“User”
Input the user name of the server.
“Password”
Input the password of the server.
“PASV Mode”
Turn the PASV mode on/off. • “Total”: Progress of all the files to be uploaded.
“Destination Directory” • “Status”: Progress of the file that is currently
Specify the directory for uploading. being uploaded.
• “Remain Time”: Estimated remaining time for
“Using Secure Protocol”
uploading.
Set whether to perform secure FTP uploading.
• “Transfer data rate”: Transfer rate indication.
“Load Certification”
Reads the CA certificate. To cancel or start uploading, or delete a file from
* Format the certificate that is read in PEM format and the file list
store it on the root directory of an SD card with the file
name, “certification.pem.” 1 Select the file on the list.
“Clear Certification”
Clear the CA certificate.
2 Touch at the upper right of the
screen.
Changing the registered server settings Select the item.
• “Abort selected”: Cancels uploading the
Touch “Edit” after selecting the server for which selected file.
you want to change the settings on the “Upload • “Delete from list”: Deletes the selected file
Settings” screen. Change the settings on the from the list.
screen for changing the settings. • “Start selected”: Starts uploading the
For details about the setting items, see “Register selected file.
the server for uploading” (page 65). • “Select All”: Selects all files on the list.
• “Clear completed”: Deletes the list of all
Deleting the registered server the uploaded files.
Touch “Delete” after selecting the server that you
want to delete on the “Upload Settings” screen.
When the confirmation screen appears, touch
“OK.” The selected server is deleted and the
display returns to the previous screen.

66 About the Web Menu

Error/Warning Indicator
If the camcorder detects an error on the device
that is connected via wireless LAN, the error
message appears on the “Device Status” screen
(page 62).

Type Error/ Description

warning ID
Hard E01-003 Device Error
E01-004 3G/4G Device Error
E01-005 Firmware update error
AV E02-002 SDI Signal Error

Recording
Communication E03-001 Communication Error
E03-002 Not supported device
E03-003 File Transfer Error
E03-004 Firmware update error
E03-005 Authentication failed*
Media W04-001 No Media
W04-002 Media Capacity Over
E04-003 Read Error
E04-004 Write Error (other
than Media Capacity
Over)
W04-005 Locked Media
W04-006 Media Full (reached
to 600 clips)
E04-007 Not supported media

* Sony Ci authentication is expired, or FTP server

authentication failed.

About the Web Menu 67

 Playback
Thumbnail Screens
When you press the THUMBNAIL button (page 9), clips recorded on the SxS memory card are displayed
as thumbnails on the screen. If no clips are recorded on the card, a no-clip message is displayed.
You can start playback from the clip selected on the thumbnail screen. The playback picture can be seen
on the LCD monitor/EVF and external monitors.
Press the STOP/CAM button (page 9) to exit the thumbnail screen and return to the recording screen.
Note
Even if the SxS memory card contains a mixture of HD and SD clips, the normal thumbnail screen shows only clips of
the mode selected in “HD/SD” in “System” (page 105) of the OTHERS menu.
To display all recorded clips regardless of the HD/SD Mode, switch the screen to the All-Clip thumbnail screen (page 69).

Configuration of the Thumbnail Screen

Data for the clip selected with the cursor are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Playback

The icon of the current SxS memory card is highlighted, shading the nonselected
one. (If the card is write-protected, a lock icon is displayed to the left.)

Current clip No./ Total number of clips

Cursor
(yellow)

01 / JAN / 2009 10 : 53 S&Q 29 / 24

JPAN0011( 1 ) HQ 1920 / 23.9P MP4

1. Thumbnail Split files can be viewed via the EXPAND CLIP

In UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD Mode: The screen (page 75).
thumbnail image for each clip is an index frame 2. Date and starting time of recording
from the clip. When recording, the first frame of
a clip is automatically set as the index frame. 3. Clip name
This frame can be adjusted (page 77). If the clip In FAT SD Mode, if the file was split into
is locked or is set with an OK mark, the lock multiple parts because its file size exceeded 2
mark is displayed. GB, the segment number is displayed after the
In FAT SD mode: The thumbnail image for each name, separated with a slash.
clip is the first frame of the clip. If the file was
split into multiple parts because its file size
exceeded 2 GB, the take mark is displayed.

68 Thumbnail Screens
 4. Lock mark (UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD FAT HD Mode
Mode) The normal thumbnail screen, OK clip thumbnail
UDF and exFAT: A lock mark appears if the screen, and All-Clip thumbnail screen are
selected clip is locked. cyclically displayed.
FAT HD Mode: A lock mark appears if the
FAT SD Mode
selected clip has an OK mark.
The normal thumbnail screen and All-Clip
5. AV independent file icon (UDF, exFAT, thumbnail screen are alternately displayed.
and FAT HD Mode)
Displayed only if the selected clip is an AV
independent file. This indicates that not all
OK/NG/KP/None-Clip thumbnail screen
operations and indications may be available, Only the clips flagged OK/NG/KP—or clips with
because the clip may have been added manually no flag (“None”)—among the clips on the current
to the SxS file via a computer, etc., and there is SxS memory card are displayed.
no management file for it. You can select the type of flag to display with
6. Recording video format “Filter Clips” in “Clip” (page 106) of the
OTHERS menu.
7. File format
The file format (MXF, MP4, AVI) of the
selected clip is displayed. (This item is not OK-Clip thumbnail screen
indicated when the recording mode is UDF HD Only the clips marked OK among the clips on the

Playback
Mode or exFAT HD.) current SxS memory card are displayed.
8. Duration of the clip
9. Timecode All-Clip thumbnail screen
The timecode of the index frame is displayed.
The All-Clip thumbnail screen shows all clips on
10. OK/NG/KP mark (UDF, exFAT, and FAT the current SxS memory card regardless of the
HD Mode) HD or SD Mode, permitting you to check whether
UDF and exFAT: The mark is displayed if the the card contains any clips of another mode than
selected clip has an OK/NG/KP flag. that currently selected.
FAT HD Mode: The OK mark is displayed if the
selected clip has an OK mark. Note
11. Special recording information (UDF, You cannot start playback from the All-Clip thumbnail
screen.
exFAT, and FAT HD Mode) Press the THUMBNAIL button again to return to the
If the selected clip was recorded in a special normal thumbnail screen, and playback and clip
recording mode (Slow & Quick Motion, Interval operations are enabled.
Recording, or Frame Recording), the mode is
displayed. Switching the SxS memory cards
Clips recorded in Slow & Quick Motion display
the “Recording frame rate/playback frame rate When two memory cards are loaded, press the
fps” to the right. SLOT SELECT button (page 11) to switch
memory cards.
Note
Changing the Type of Thumbnail
Card switching is enabled only when the thumbnail
Screen screen is displayed or when an external input picture is
displayed by pressing the STOP/CAM button.
The type of thumbnail screen can be changed as You cannot switch memory cards during playback.
Continuous playback of cards in slots A and B is not
follows by pressing the THUMBNAIL button
possible.
(page 9).
UDF, exFAT
The normal thumbnail screen, OK/NG/KP/None
clip thumbnail screen, and All-Clip thumbnail
screen are cyclically displayed.

Thumbnail Screens 69
 Information displayed on the playback
Playing Clips screen
The following information is superimposed on
For playback operations, use the playback control the playback picture.
buttons on the handle (page 9). When the IR
Remote Commander is enabled, you can use its
playback control buttons instead (page 19). 1 2 3 4 5
120min B PLAY TCR 00:00:00:00
0011/03 00
Playing the Selected and
Subsequent Clips in Sequence
1 Using the up/down/left/right buttons or
the jog dial, move the cursor to the
thumbnail image of the clip with which CH1
CH2

you wish to start playback.

7
2 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
Playback

Playback starts from the beginning of the 1. Battery remaining/DC IN voltage

selected clip. 2. Playback mode
Notes 3. SxS memory card
A mark appears to the left if the SxS memory
• The playback picture may be momentarily distorted or
frozen between clips. The playback control buttons card is write-protected.
and THUMBNAIL button do not function during this 4. Time data
condition.
The time data for the playback picture are
• When you select a clip on the thumbnail screen and
start playback, the playback picture at the beginning of displayed. Each time you press the
the clip may be distorted. To start playback without DURATION/TC/U-BIT button, the indication
distortion, once pause playback after starting it, press is switched between timecode (TCR) and user-
the PREV button to return to the top of the clip, then bit (UB) data.
restart playback.
5. Clip no./total number of clips
This is displayed for FAT. It is also displayed
for UDF and exFAT if “Find Mode” in “Clip”
(page 106) of the OTHERS menu is set to
“Clip.”
6. Clip no./total number of clips, essence
mark no./total number of essence marks
This is displayed for UDF and exFAT if “Find
Mode” in “Clip” (page 106) of the OTHERS
menu is set to “Rec Start.”
7. Audio levels
The audio levels for the recording are displayed.

70 Playing Clips
Monitoring Audio
Clip Operations
In Normal playback mode, you can monitor the
recorded audio signals through the built-in
During thumbnail screen playback, etc., you can
speaker (page 8) or connected headphones.
operate the clips or confirm and change the
With the headphones connected to the headphone
subsidiary data for clips using the Clip Operation
connector (page 7), the built-in speaker is turned
menus. The corresponding Clip Operation menu
off.
pops up on the screens as shown below when you
Press the VOLUME buttons (page 9) to adjust the
press the SEL/SET button or the jog dial.
sound volume.
You can select audio channel(s) to be monitored
with “Audio Output” (page 92) of the AUDIO Clip Operation Menus
SET menu.
Thumbnail screen (page 72)
CANCEL
Cueing Up
DISP CLIP INFO
To start playback from the top of the first clip
OK MARK ADD (FAT only)
Press the PREV button and F REV button

Playback
simultaneously. The top of the first-recorded clip OK MARK DELETE (FAT only)
on the memory card is cued up. OK FLAG ADD (UDF and exFAT)
To start playback from the top of the last clip NG FLAG ADD (UDF and exFAT)
Press the F FWD button and NEXT button
simultaneously. The top of the last-recorded clip KEEP FLAG ADD (UDF and exFAT)
on the memory card is cued up. CLIP FLAG DELETE (UDF and exFAT)

LOCK CLIP (UDF and exFAT)

Adding Shot Marks During UNLOCK CLIP (UDF and exFAT)
Playback (UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD COPY CLIP
Mode) DELETE CLIP

In the same manner as in recording, you can add ALL MARKS

shot marks to the clip during playback. SHOT MARK1
At the point where you wish to add a shot SHOT MARK2
mark, press the “Shot Mark1” or “Shot
REC START MARK (UDF and exFAT)
Mark2” assigned button.
EXPAND CLIP
Notes
• No shot mark can be added if the memory card is write-
protected.
• No shot mark can be added to the first or last frame of
a clip.

Clip Operations 71
 Expand Clip screen (page 76)
Clip Operation menu on the thumbnail
CANCEL
screen
EXPAND (COARSE)
Pressing the SEL/SET button or the jog dial with
EXPAND (FINE) the thumbnail screen (page 68) displayed calls the
PAUSE Clip Operation menu for the clip at the cursor.
SET INDEX PIC Item Function
DISP CLIP INFO Displays the clip's information
SHOT MARK1 ADD
screen (page 73).
SHOT MARK2 ADD OK MARK Adds an OK mark (page 74).
ADD 1)
SHOT MARK1 DEL
OK MARK Deletes the OK mark (page 74).
SHOT MARK2 DEL DELETE 1)
DIVIDE CLIP (FAT only) OK FLAG Adds an OK flag (page 74).
ADD 2)
Shot Mark screen (page 77) NG FLAG Adds a NG flag (page 74).
CANCEL ADD 2)
KEEP FLAG Adds a KP flag (page 74).
PAUSE
ADD 2)
Playback

SET INDEX PIC CLIP FLAG Deletes the flag (page 74).
SHOT MARK1 DEL DELETE 2)
LOCK CLIP 2) Locks and protects a clip (page
SHOT MARK2 DEL
74).
DIVIDE CLIP (FAT only) UNLOCK CLIP 2) Unlocks a protected clip (page
74).
Note COPY CLIP Copies the clip to another SxS
memory card (page 74).
Selectable menu items are limited in SD Mode.
DELETE CLIP Deletes the clip (page 75).
ALL MARKS 3) Displays thumbnails of all frames
Basic Operations of the Clip with an essence mark recorded
(page 76).
Operation Menus SHOT MARK1 3) Displays only thumbnails of
frames with shot mark 1 recorded
Use the up/down/left/right buttons or the jog dial (page 76).
to select a menu item, then press the SEL/SET SHOT MARK2 3) Displays only thumbnails of
button or the jog dial. frames with shot mark 2 recorded
Pressing the CANCEL button restores the (page 76).
previous condition. REC START Displays thumbnails of frames
Selecting “CANCEL” from a Clip Operation MARK with a Recording Start mark and
menu turns the Clip Operation menu off. the first frames of clips without
Recording Start marks (page 76).
Notes EXPAND CLIP Switches to the EXPAND CLIP
• When the SxS memory card is write-protected, some screen (page 75).
operations are unavailable.
• There may be items that cannot be selected depending 1) Effective with FAT HD Mode only.
on the status when the menu is displayed. 2) Effective with UDF and exFAT only.
3) Effective with UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD Mode.

72 Clip Operations
Displaying the Detailed Information of a Clip
Select “DISP CLIP INFO” from a Clip Operation menu.

4
120min CL I P I NFO 0011 / 0300
5
1 JPAN0011( 1 ) OK 6
01 / JAN / 2009 10 : 53 7
HQ 1920 / 23.9 P MP4 8
S&Q Mot i on 29 / 24fp s 9
TCR 00 : 05 : 00 : 02 10
TCR 00 : 05 : 00 : 00 STR 11
TCR 00 : 08 : 19 : 23 END 12
2 DUR 00 : 03 : 20 : 00 13
CH1 /2 /3 /4 /5 /6 /7 /8 14
PREV CLI P NEXT CL I P 15
3

Playback
1. Image of the current clip 6. OK/NG/KP mark (UDF, exFAT, and FAT
2. Image of the previous clip HD Mode)
Press the PREV button to switch to the clip info UDF and exFAT: The mark is displayed if the
screen of the previous clip. selected clip has an OK/NG/KP flag.
In FAT SD Mode, the previous segment of a FAT HD Mode: The OK mark is displayed if the
segmented clip is displayed. selected clip has an OK mark.

3. Image of the next clip 7. Date and starting time of recording

Press the NEXT button to switch to the clip info 8. File format
screen of the next clip. The file format (MXF, MP4, AVI) of the
In FAT SD Mode, the next segment of a selected clip is displayed.
segmented clip is displayed.
9. Special recording information (UDF,
4. Clip name exFAT, and FAT HD Mode)
For a clip name of 12 characters or longer, only If the selected clip was recorded in a special
the first 5 and last 5 characters of the name are recording mode (Slow & Quick Motion, Interval
displayed. To check the non-displayed block of Recording, or Frame Recording), the mode is
the name, press the jog dial or the SEL/SET displayed.
button to display the entire clip name (Long- Clips recorded in Slow & Quick Motion display
Display mode). Press the jog dial or the SEL/ the “Recording frame rate/playback frame rate
SET button again to cancel Long-Display mode. fps” to the right.
Long-Display mode is also canceled by
10. Timecode of the displayed frame
switching to the previous or next clip with the
PREV or NEXT button. 11. Timecode at the recording starting point
In FAT SD Mode, if the file was split into 12. Timecode at the recording ending point
multiple parts because its file size exceeded 2
GB, the segment number is displayed after the
13. Duration of the clip
name, separated with a slash. 14. Recorded audio channels
5. Lock mark (UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD 15. Recorded video format
Mode)
UDF and exFAT: A lock mark appears if the
selected clip is locked.
FAT HD Mode: A lock mark appears if the
selected clip has an OK mark.

Clip Operations 73
 Adding/Deleting a Flag (UDF and Copying Clips
exFAT)
You can copy clips on an SxS memory card to
You can add an OK/NG/KP flag to clips recorded another SxS memory card.
in UDF or exFAT. By adding flags, you can set Each clip is copied with the same name to the
the camcorder to display only clips with certain destination SxS memory card.
flag settings on the thumbnail screen (OK/NG/ Notes
KP/None-Clip thumbnail screen) (page 69).
• If there is another clip having the same name on the
When adding a flag, you can select from OK destination SxS memory card, the clip is copied under
FLAG ADD, NG FLAG ADD, and KEEP FLAG a name adding a single-digit number in parentheses to
ADD in the Clip Operation menu (page 72) on the the end of the original clip name.
The parenthetical number is the minimum value that
thumbnail screen. When deleting a flag, select
does not exist in the destination memory card.
CLIP FLAG DELETE. Examples:
ABCD0002(1) if ABCD0002 exists
Note ABCD0002(2) if ABCD0002(1) exists
Flagged clips are not protected. To protect clips from ABCD0005(4) if ABCD0005(3) exists
deletion, select LOCK CLIP in the Clip Operation menu • When using FAT, you cannot copy a file 10 times or
(page 72) on the thumbnail screen. To remove the more if clips with the same clip name followed by
protection, select UNLOCK CLIP. parenthetical numbers (1) to (9) already exist on the
Playback

card.
• When using UDF or exFAT, you cannot copy a file
1000 times or more if clips with the same clip name
Adding/Deleting the OK Mark (FAT followed by parenthetical numbers (1) to (999) already
HD Mode Only) exist on the card.
• A warning message is displayed if there is not
sufficient space on the destination SxS memory card.
By adding an OK mark to clips recorded in FAT
Replace the SxS memory card with one with sufficient
HD Mode, you can set the camcorder to display space.
only the necessary clips on the thumbnail screen • When copying an SxS memory card on which multiple
(page 69). Clips with an OK mark added are clips have been recorded, copying all clips to the end
may not be achieved, even if the destination card has
blocked from being deleted or segmented. To
the same capacity as the source card, depending on
delete or segment them, remove the OK mark. usage conditions, memory characteristics, etc.
From the thumbnail screen Clip Operation menu
(page 72), you can select OK MARK ADD to add Copying a specified clip
an OK mark, or OK MARK DELETE to delete
the OK mark. You can copy a clip selected on the thumbnail
screen to another SxS memory card.
Select “COPY CLIP” from the Clip Operation
menu.

Copying clips collectively

By using the Setup menu, you can copy clips on
an SxS memory card collectively to another SxS
memory card.
If the memory card contains clips of both HD and
SD Mode, only the clips of the currently selected
mode are copied. This may be convenient when
you wish to extract clips of the same mode only.
Select “Clips” in “Copy All” (page 107) of the
OTHERS menu.

74 Clip Operations
Deleting Clips EXPAND CLIP screen in UDF, exFAT, and
FAT HD Mode
You can delete clips from the SxS memory card.
Select “DELETE CLIP” from the Clip Operation Current frame number
menu.
120min EXPAND CLIP 0000123
Note
Clips with an OK mark and flagged clips set to LOCK 01 : 10 : 20 : 00 01 : 10 : 30 : 00 01 : 10 : 40 : 00 01 : 10 : 50 : 00
CLIP cannot be deleted.
To delete them, release the OK mark or the LOCK CLIP
setting before performing the delete operation. S1 01 : 11 : 00 : 00 S2 01 : 11 : 10 : 00 01 : 11 : 20 : 00 01 : 11 : 30 : 00

Deleting clips collectively

01 : 11 : 40 : 00 01 : 11 : 50 : 00 S2 01 : 12 : 00 : 00 S1 01 : 12 : 10 : 00

By using the Setup menu, you can delete clips 01 / JAN / 2009 10 : 53 S&Q 29 / 24 TCR 01 : 10: 20 : 00
JPAN0011( 1 ) HQ 1920 / 23 . 9 P DUR 00 : 03 : 19 : 23
from an SxS memory card collectively.
Select “All Clips DEL” in “Clip” (page 106) of 1 2
the OTHERS menu.
Notes Detailed information for the clip is displayed at

Playback
• If the memory card contains clips of both HD and SD the bottom of the screen.
Mode, only the clips of the currently selected mode are The items other than the following are the same as
deleted. those on the normal thumbnail screen (page 68):
• Clips with an OK mark and flagged clips set to LOCK
CLIP cannot be deleted. 1. Frame information
The following icons show the marking for the
frame at the cursor.
Displaying the EXPAND CLIP
Index frame
Screen
Frame with shot mark 1 added
In UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD Mode, the S1
EXPAND CLIP screen permits you to divide a
clip into 12 blocks of equal duration and show a
S2 Frame with shot mark 2 added

thumbnail image of the first frame of each block

The same icons may also be displayed below the
on the screen. thumbnail image of each frame. If the frame has
In FAT SD Mode, the EXPAND CLIP screen multiple markings, one of the icons is displayed,
shows the thumbnail images of the first frames of in the priority order of index frame, shot mark 1,
the segment files only for a clip segmented and shot mark 2.
because its file size exceeded 2 GB.
2. Timecode indication
This helps you to quickly cue up to a desired
The timecode of the frame at the cursor is
scene in a clip of long duration.
displayed.
You can display the EXPAND CLIP screen by
selecting the clip on the thumbnail screen.

1 Select a clip on the thumbnail screen,

then press the SEL/SET button or the
jog dial.
The corresponding Clip Operation menu
pops up.

2 Select “EXPAND CLIP.”

The EXPAND CLIP screen appears for the
clip that you selected on the thumbnail
screen.

Clip Operations 75
 EXPAND CLIP screen in FAT SD Mode Item Function
SHOT MARK1 To delete shot mark 1 from the
DEL selected frame (page 77)
Current frame number SHOT MARK2 To delete shot mark 2 from the
DEL selected frame (page 77)
120min EXPAND CLIP 0000001
DIVIDE CLIP To divide the clip into two clips at
the selected frame (page 77)
00 : 00 : 00 : 00 00 : 09 : 30 : 00 00 : 19 : 00 : 00

FAT SD Mode
You can select “PAUSE” only on the EXPAND
CLIP screen in FAT SD Mode.

01 / JAN /2009 10 : 53 TCR 00 : 00 : 00 : 00

JPAN0011 _01 DVCAM29.9PsF SQ DUR 00 : 09 : 30 : 00
Displaying the SHOT MARK
1 2 Screen (UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD
Detailed information for the clip is displayed at
Mode)
the bottom of the screen. When one or more shot marks or recording start
The items other than the following are the same as marks are recorded for a single clip, you can
Playback

those on the normal thumbnail screen (page 68): display only frames with those marks as
1. Timecode indication thumbnail images on the screen.
The timecode of the segmentation file at the
cursor is displayed. 1 Select a clip on the thumbnail screen,
2. Duration then press the SEL/SET button or the
The duration of the segmentation file at the jog dial.
cursor is displayed.
2 Select ALL MARK, SHOT MARK1,
Clip Operation menu on the EXPAND CLIP SHOT MARK2, or REC START
MARK from the Clip Operation menu
screen
(page 72).
UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD Mode
When you select a frame on the EXPAND CLIP SHOT MARK screen example (when ALL
screen and press the SEL/SET button or the jog MARKS is selected)
dial, the Clip Operation menu pops up to enable
operations such as displaying more detailed split 120min SHOT MARK1 0031 / 0031
displays and saving the frames after the selected
frame as different clip.
S1 01 : 10 : 20 : 00 S2 01 : 10 : 30 : 00 S2 01 : 10 : 40 : 00 S1 01 : 10 : 50 : 00
Item Function
EXPAND To decrease the number of
S1 01 : 11 : 00 : 00 S1 01 : 11 : 10 : 00 - - - - - -
(COARSE) partitions of the clip
EXPAND To increase the number of
(FINE) partitions of the clip - - - - - - - - - - - -

PAUSE To set to Pause mode at the 01 / JAN / 2009 10 : 53 S&Q 29 / 24 TCR 01 : 12: 00 : 00
JPAN0011( 1 ) HQ 1920 / 23 . 9 P DUR 00 : 03 : 19 : 23
selected frame
SET INDEX PIC To specify the selected frame for
1
the index frame of the clip (page
77) The detailed information of the clip is displayed
SHOT MARK1 To add shot mark 1 to the selected at the bottom of the screen.
ADD frame (page 77)
The items other than the following are the same as
SHOT MARK2 To add shot mark 2 to the selected
those on the EXPAND CLIP screen (page 75) in
ADD frame (page 77)
UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD mode:

76 Clip Operations
 1. Timecode indication
The timecode of the frame at the cursor on the
Adding a shot mark on the EXPAND CLIP
SHOT MARK screen is displayed. screen
Move the cursor to the first/last frame Select “SHOT MARK1 ADD” or “SHOT
When the cursor is at a user-designated position, MARK2 ADD” from the Clip Operation menu.
press the F REV and PREV buttons
simultaneously to move the cursor the first frame. Deleting a shot mark
Press the F FWD and NEXT buttons
You can delete shot marks on the EXPAND CLIP
simultaneously to move the cursor to the last
screen (page 75) or on the SHOT MARK screen
frame.
(page 76).
Switch to the clip shot mark screen for a different Select “SHOT MARK1 DEL” or “SHOT
clip MARK2 DEL” from the Clip Operation menu.
When the cursor is at the first frame for a clip,
press the PREV or up button, or turn the jog dial
up to switch to the previous displayable clip shot Changing the Index Frame (UDF,
mark screen. exFAT, and FAT HD Mode)
When the cursor is at the last frame for a clip,
press the NEXT or down button, or turn the jog You can change the index frame to another frame
dial down to switch to the next displayable clip you selected on the EXPAND CLIP screen (page

Playback
shot mark screen. 75) or the SHOT MARK screen (page 76).
Select “SET INDEX PIC” from the Clip
Clip Operation menu on the SHOT MARK Operation menu.
screen Note
When you select a frame on the SHOT MARK Even if you specify a frame other than the top frame for
screen and press the SEL/SET button or the jog the index frame, playback always begins from the top
frame when you start it from the thumbnail screen.
dial, the Clip Operation menu pops up to permit
you further operations.
Item Function Dividing a Clip (FAT HD Mode
PAUSE To set to Pause mode at the selected Only)
frame
SET INDEX PIC To specify the selected frame for the In FAT HD Mode, you can divide a clip into two
index frame of the clip (page 77) different clips at the frame you select on the
SHOT MARK1 To delete the shot mark 1 from the EXPAND CLIP screen (page 75) or the SHOT
DEL selected frame (page 77) MARK screen (page 76).
SHOT MARK2 To delete the shot mark 2 from the Select “DIVIDE CLIP” from the Clip Operation
DEL selected frame (page 77)
menu.
DIVIDE CLIP To divide the clip into two clips at
The first 4 characters of the original clip name are
the selected frame (page 77) (FAT
HD mode Only)
carried on, continuing to the last number on the
memory card by the second 4 numerics.
Example: If you divide a clip named ABCD0002
into two clips under the condition where a
Adding/Deleting Shot Marks (UDF,
new clip will be named EFGH0100, clip
exFAT, and FAT HD Mode) ABCD0100 and clip ABCD0101 are created.
Note
Adding a shot mark in Pause mode
If the remaining space on the memory card is insufficient
Select “SHOT MARK1 ADD” or “SHOT for divided clips, a message informing you of it appears.
MARK2 ADD” from the Clip Operation menu.

Clip Operations 77
 Zebra: Zebra status

Showing the Status Display Contents

1 “On” is displayed and the setting of
Screens “Zebra1 Level” in “Zebra” of the LCD/VF
SET menu is displayed to the right when
“Zebra Select” in “Zebra” of the LCD/VF
Press the STATUS button (page 9) to display SET menu is set to “1” or “Both” and you
status screens on the LCD monitor/EVF screen/ set the Zebra function to “On.” If the Zebra
external video monitor. function is set to “Off” or “Zebra Select” is
Use the up/down buttons (page 9) or the jog dial set to “2,” “Off” appears.
(page 10) to perform operations and switch the 2 “On” is displayed when “Zebra Select” in
screens in sequence. “Zebra” of the LCD/VF SET menu is set to
When you press the STATUS button again, the “2” or “Both” and you set the Zebra
function to “On.” If the Zebra function is
status screen display is canceled.
set to “Off” or “Zebra Select” is set to “1,”
For connections of an external monitor, see “Off” appears.
“Connecting External Monitors and Recording
Devices” on page 111.
Skin Tone Detail: Skin-tone detail status
The current status (On or Off) of “Setting” of
Camera Status Screen “Skin Tone Detail” of the PICTURE PROFILE
Playback

menu is displayed.
White Bal: White balance status Picture Profile: Picture Profile selection status
Display Contents The selected Picture Profile number and name are
B The color temperature stored in white displayed. (If Picture Profile is off, “Off” is
memory B is indicated. displayed.)
A The color temperature stored in white
memory A is indicated.
PRST The color temperature set as the preset
white is indicated. The color temperature of
preset white can be changed using the
PICTURE PROFILE menu.

Gain: GAIN switch settings

The gain values of the positions L, M, and H of
the GAIN switch assigned of the CAMERA SET
menu are displayed.
Handle Zoom Speed: Handle zoom speed
settings
The zoom speed that is set at “High”/“Low” of
“Zoom Speed” (page 86) of the CAMERA SET
menu are displayed.
Display Contents
L Zoom speed that is set at “Low” of “Zoom
Speed.”
H Zoom speed that is set at “High” of “Zoom
Speed.”

78 Showing the Status Screens

 CH1” to “Wind Filter CH4” in “Audio Input” of
Audio Status Screen the AUDIO SET menu.

Output CH: External output/headphone output

Depending on the setting of “Output CH” in Video Status Screen
“Audio Output” of the AUDIO SET menu and the
setting of “Monitor CH,” the audio channel(s) Video Format
external output and headphones output is Video Format: Video format setting
displayed as follows. The number of vertical lines, frame rate, and scan
• CH-1: When left/right are CH-1 format (i/P) of the video format set in “Format” in
• CH-2: When left/right are CH-2 “System” of the OTHERS menu are displayed.
• CH-3: When left/right are CH-3
Rec Mode: Recording bit rate
• CH-4: When left/right are CH-4
The video format set in “Format” in “System” of
• CH-1/CH-2: When left is CH-1 and right is CH-
the OTHERS menu is displayed.
2 (stereo)
• CH-3/CH-4: When left is CH-3 and right is CH- 3G SDI OUT Level: Data mapping method of the
4 (stereo) 3G SDI signal
• CH-1+CH-2: When both left and right are CH- The data mapping method of the 3G SDI signal
1 and CH-2 (monaural) set in “3G SDI OUT Level A/B” of the VIDEO
• CH-3+CH-4: When both left and right are CH- SET menu is displayed.

Playback
3 and CH-4 (monaural) SDI Output: Output for SDI
Speaker: Speaker output The “SDI” setting in “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O
The audio channel(s) output to the internal Select” of the VIDEO SET menu is displayed.
speaker is displayed. HDMI Output: Output for HDMI
As the speaker is monaural, CH-1+CH-2 or CH- The “HDMI” setting in “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O
3+CH-4 is displayed when “Monitor CH” is set to Select” of the VIDEO SET menu is displayed.
stereo. With non-stereo settings, the setting of
“Monitor CH” in “Audio Output” of the AUDIO i.LINK I/O: Input and output for i.LINK
The “i.LINK” setting in “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O
SET menu is displayed as it is.
Select” of the VIDEO SET menu is displayed.
CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4: Audio level meters
Down Converter: SD output down-converter
The 4-channel audio level meters (2 meters when
using 2-channel settings) and input source are setting
displayed. In HD Mode, the “Down Converter” setting
(Squeeze, Letterbox, Edge Crop) of the VIDEO
While recording (or standing by to record), the
level of the audio inputs (the EE audio levels) are SET menu is displayed.
displayed. During playback, the audio playback In SD Mode, “Edge Crop” is displayed when EC
(Edge Crop) in “Format” in “System” of the
level is displayed according to the setting of
“Output CH” in “Audio Output” of the AUDIO OTHERS menu is selected, and “Squeeze” is
SET menu. displayed when SQ (Squeeze) in “Format” in
“System” of the OTHERS menu is selected.
If audio is input from the i.LINK (HDV/DV)
connector while displaying thumbnails, while 23.98P Output: 23.98P output mode
playback is stopped, or while recording an The “23.98P Output” setting (23.98PsF, 59.94i
external signal, the audio input level is displayed. (2-3 Pull Down)) of the VIDEO SET menu is
In this case, the leftmost channels that are displayed.
displayed are CH-1 and CH-2, regardless of the
setting of “Output CH” in “Audio Output” of the
AUDIO SET menu.
Wind Filter
The “On”/“Off” setting of Wind Filter is
displayed to the right of each input source. Wind
Filter settings can be made from “Wind Filter

Showing the Status Screens 79

 At the right, the available time for recording is
Button/Remote Status Screen displayed.
The time indication will be “- - min” if no SD card
Assign Button: Assignable button statuses or an invalid card is in the SD card slot.
The functions assigned with the “Assign Button”
of the OTHERS menu to the respective
assignable buttons are displayed.
IR Remote: IR Remote Commander status
The “IR Remote” setting of the OTHERS menu is
displayed.

Battery/Media Status Screen

Battery: Battery charge remaining
The remaining charge level of the mounted
battery pack is displayed.
Charge Count: Repeated charge times
The number of times that the mounted battery
Playback

pack has been charged is displayed.

HDD A/HDD B: Battery remaining of PHU-220R
units
When professional hard disk units are connected,
the remaining power levels of the batteries of the
professional hard disk units connected via the
respective card slots are displayed.
Media A/Media B: Remaining space, available
recording time, and estimated service life
(rewriting limit)
The remaining space of the SxS memory cards in
the respective card slots is indicated on the
meters.
At the right, the available time for recording if
done at the current bit rate is displayed, in
minutes.
The time indication will be “- - min” if no SxS
memory card or an invalid card is in the slot.
If the card is write-protected, a icon is shown
to the right of the time indication.
The Life value is displayed only for an SxS
memory card which supports the life value
indication. It indicates the estimated remaining
usable period of the card (virgin status as 100%).
If an alarm is generated, make a backup of the
card as soon as possible and replace it with a new
card.
SD Card: Remaining space and available
recording time of an SD card
The remaining space of the SD card in the SD
card slot is indicated on the meters.

80 Showing the Status Screens

 Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Overview of the Setup Menus
Press the MENU button to display setup menus
on the LCD monitor/EVF screen with settings Setup Menu Layers
necessary for recording and playback. (You can
also display setup menus on an external monitor.) MENU
Set items by selecting them from the following
CAMERA SET Gain Setup
menus.
Shutter
CAMERA SET menu: For setting items related
SLS/EX SLS
to recording other than those for picture quality.
MF Assist
(For picture quality-related items, use the
Color Bars
PICTURE PROFILE menu (page 44).)
Flicker Reduce
AUDIO SET menu: For setting audio-related
Handle Zoom
items.
Zoom Speed
VIDEO SET menu: For setting video output-
Zoom Transition
related items.
Interval Rec
LCD/VF SET menu: For setting items related to
Frame Rec
the LCD monitor/EVF display.
Clip Cont.Rec
TC/UB SET menu: For setting items related to
P.Cache Rec
timecodes and user bits.
S&Q Motion
OTHERS menu: For setting other items.
Proxy

Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

Rec Review
TLCS
Shockless White
White Switch<B>
ATW Speed
ATW Mode
Image Inversion
Auto Black Bal.

AUDIO SET Audio Input

Audio Output

VIDEO SET Input Source Select

SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O
Select
3G SDI OUT Level A/B
SDI/HDMI/Video Out
Super
Down Converter
23.98P Output
SDI Rec Control
Match Clip Name
(continues)

Overview of the Setup Menus 81

 LCD/VF SET LCD
EVF
Peaking
Basic Menu Operations
Marker
Zebra
Display On/Off
Menu controls
MENU button (page 9)
TC/UB SET Timecode To turn Menu mode to use Setup menus on/off.
Users Bit
TC Format Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, SEL/SET button
(page 9)
OTHERS All Reset When you press the up/down/left/right buttons,
Network Reset the cursor moves in the corresponding direction,
Camera Data permitting you to select menu items or setting
Time Zone values.
Clock Set Press the SEL/SET button to enter the highlighted
Language item.
Assign Button Jog dial (SEL/SET dial) (page 10)
Tally When you turn the dial, the cursor moves up or
Hours Meter down, permitting you to select menu items or
IR Remote setting values.
Battery Alarm Press the jog dial to select the highlighted item.
Battery INFO
CANCEL button (page 9)
Genlock
To return to the previous layer of the menu. An
Direct Menu
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

uncompleted change is canceled.

Trigger Mode
System Note
Clip In Focus Magnifier mode (page 32), the setup
Copy All menu cannot be used. Press the FOCUS MAG
Format Media button to exit this mode.
Plan.Metadata
Network
Proxy File
Fan Control
Version
Version Up
Menu Scroll

82 Basic Menu Operations

Setting the Setup menus Entering a character string
Rotate the jog dial or press the up/down/left/right When you select an item for which a character
buttons to set the cursor to the icon of the menu string, such as a time value or filename, is to be
you wish to set, then push the jog dial or SEL/ specified, the input area for the character string is
SET button to select that menu. highlighted, and “SET” appears at the right end.
• The menu item selection area can show 7 lines
at maximum. When all the selectable items 1 Select characters by pressing the up/
cannot be displayed at one time, you can scroll down/left/right buttons or turning the
the display up or down by moving the cursor. A jog dial, then press the SEL/SET button
triangle appears at the upper or lower right or the jog dial to proceed.
corner of the menu item selection area to The cursor moves to the next column.
indicate that scrolling is enabled. To return to the previous column, press the
• For items having a wide range of available left button.
values (example: –99 to +99), the available
value area is not displayed. The current setting 2 Perform setting in the same manner up
is highlighted instead, indicating that the setting to the last column/digit.
is ready for change. The cursor moves to “SET.”
• When you select “Execute” for an execution
item, the corresponding function is executed. 3 Press the jog dial or the SEL/SET
• When you select an item that you must confirm button.
before execution, the menu display temporarily The setting is completed.
disappears, and a confirmation message is
displayed. Following the instructions of the
message, and specify whether to execute or

Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

cancel.

Basic Menu Operations 83

 Setup Menu List
The functions and available settings of menus are listed below.
The default settings set at the factory are shown in bold face (example: Speed). The items marked with
[M] in the Menu items column cannot be set while displaying the thumbnail screen or during playback
operations.

CAMERA SET Menu

CAMERA SET
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
Gain Setup Low Set the gain level to be used when the switch is set to the L
Assigning gain –3 / 0 / 3 / 6 / 9 /12 /18 dB position.
levels to the three Mid Set the gain level to be used when the switch is set to the M
GAIN switch –3 / 0 / 3 / 6 / 9 /12 /18 dB position.
positions
High Set the gain level to be used when the switch is set to the H
–3 / 0 / 3 / 6 / 9 /12 / 18 dB position.
Shutter Mode Select modes of the Electronic Shutter.
Specifying Speed / Angle / ECS Speed mode/Angle mode (standard modes): These modes
operating may be especially effective when you wish to record a
conditions of the quick-moving subject with minimal blurring. You can
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

electrical shutter select Speed mode to specify the shutter speed in seconds,
Unselectable when or Angle mode to specify the shutter speed by the shutter
Slow Shutter angle.
mode/ ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode: This mode may be used to
Supersensitized shoot a monitor screen, eliminating horizontal bands.
Slow Shutter mode Shutter Speed Set the shutter speed when Speed mode is selected. The
is set. 1/32, 1/33, 1/40, 1/48, 1/50, available setting values vary depending on the frame
1/60, 1/96, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125, frequency of the video format selected.
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
Shutter Angle Set the shutter angle when Angle mode is selected. The
11.25º / 22.5º / 45º / 72º / 86.4º / following frame rates are unavailable when “S&Q Motion” is
90º / 144º / 150º / 172.8º / set from “1” to “16”: 72°, 86.4°, 144°, 150°, 172.8°, 216°.
180º / 216º
ECS Frequency Set the ECS frequency when ECS mode is selected. The
60.00 available setting values vary depending on the frame
frequency of the video format selected.

84 Setup Menu List

CAMERA SET
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
SLS/EX SLS Setting Set the number of cached frames.
Setting the Slow OFF / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 /
16 / 32 / 64 Notes
Shutter mode/
Supersensitized • This cannot be set while recording and playing, or while the
Slow Shutter mode thumbnail screen is displayed.
• This cannot be set while using Slow & Quick Motion or
Cache Recording mode
• “SLS/EX SLS” cannot be set if the video format is set to the
following settings.
HQ 1280×720/23.98P (UDF HD Mode or exFAT HD
Mode)
XAVC-L50 1080/59.94P (exFAT HD Mode)
XAVC-L50 1080/50P (exFAT HD Mode)
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94P (exFAT HD Mode)
XAVC-L35 1080/50P (exFAT HD Mode)
SP 1440×1080/23.98P (FAT HD Mode)
MF Assist On / Off Set to “On” to precisely adjust the focus automatically after
Turning the MF you roughly adjust it manually.
Assist Function
on/off
Color Bars Camera/Bars Select “Bars” to output color bars.
Setting the Color Camera / Bars
Bars Bars Type Select the type of color bar to be output when “Bars” is
Multi / 75% / 100% / SMPTE selected.

Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

Multi: Multiformat color bars are output.
75%: To output 75% color bars
100%: To output 100% color bars
SMPTE: To output SMPTE color bars.
Flicker Reduce Mode Set the operation of the Flicker-Reduction function.
Setting Flicker Auto / On / Off On: To always activate it
Compensation Auto: To automatically activate it when flicker is detected.
Off: To not activate it

Notes
• It is recommended to set this to “Off” when shooting
outdoors or under lighting that does not cause flicker. (It
can be also “Auto,” but the compensation may not be done
properly.)
• It is recommended to set this to “Auto” when shooting
indoors or under various lighting that may cause flicker,
such as fluorescent, sodium, or mercury-vapor lamps. (If
continuously shooting under lighting that may cause flicker,
“Mode” should be set to “On.”)
Frequency Set to the power supply frequency of the light source causing
50 Hz / 60 Hz flicker.
60 Hz: UC model
50 Hz: Other models

Setup Menu List 85

 CAMERA SET
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
Handle Zoom Off / Low / High / Vari Set the zoom operation by using the on-handle ZOOM button.
Setting the zoom Off: Zoom does not work.
operation Low: Zoom works at the speed that is set for “Low” in “Zoom
Speed.”
High: Zoom works at the speed that is set for “High” in
“Zoom Speed.”
Vari: The deeper the on-handle ZOOM button is pressed, the
faster the zoom speed.
Zoom Speed High Set the speed of zooming to be executed when you press the
Setting the zoom 1 to 99 (70) handle ZOOM button with the zoom speed switch set to H.
speed Low Set the speed of zooming to be executed when you press the
1 to 99 (30) handle ZOOM button with the zoom speed switch set to L.

Note
Zooming may not operate smoothly if you select a low speed.
Remote Set the speed of zooming to be executed when you press the
1 to 99 (50) ZOOM button of the IR Remote Commander.

Note
If the infrared line from the Remote Commander is not
received properly, zooming may not operate smoothly.
Zoom Linear / Soft Set the operation mode at the beginning and end of zooming
Transition with the on-handle ZOOM button.
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

Setting the zoom Linear: Zooming immediately begins at the specified speed
operation mode when the ZOOM button is pressed and immediately ends
when the button is released.
Soft: Zooming gradually increases the speed up to the
specified speed after the ZOOM button is pressed and
gradually decreases the speed and ends after the button is
released. (1 second at maximum from when the button is
released till the operation ends.)
Interval Rec Setting Turn the Interval Recording function on/off.
Setting the Interval On / Off
Recording Interval Time Set the interval of recording in Interval Recording.
function 1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 sec
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 min
1 to 4/6/12/24 hour
Number of Frames Set the number of frames to be recorded at a time in Interval
1 / 3 / 6 / 9 or Recording.
2 / 6 / 12 (When using 1080/
59.94P, 1080/50P, 720/59.94P,
or 720/50P)
Frame Rec Setting Turn the Frame Recording function on/off.
Setting the Frame On / Off
Recording Number of Frames Set the number of frames to be recorded at a time in Frame
function 1 / 3 / 6 / 9 or Recording.
2 / 6 / 12 (When using 1080/
59.94P, 1080/50P, 720/59.94P,
or 720/50P)

86 Setup Menu List

CAMERA SET
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
Clip Cont. Rec Setting Turn the Clip Continuous Recording function on/off.
Setting the Clip On / Off
Continuous
Recording
function
P.Cache Rec Setting Turn the Picture Cache Recording function on/off.
Setting the Picture On / Off
Cache Recording Rec Time Set the time to cache video in the picture cache memory (the
function 0-2sec / 2-4sec / 4-6sec / time to a point where recording is to start when you press the
6-8sec / 8-10sec / 10-12sec / REC START/STOP button in Picture Cache Recording).
12-14sec / 13-15sec
Note
When you set “Format” in “System” of the OTHERS
menu to format XAVC-I, “0-2sec” or “2-4sec” can be
selected.
S&Q Motion Setting Turn the Slow and Quick Motion function on/off.
Setting the Slow & On / Off
Quick Motion Frame Rate Set the recording frame rate for Slow & Quick Motion mode.
function UDF The setting value range varies depending on the selection
Unselectable while 1 to 30 (NTSC) region and video format.
“Format” in When “Format” is set to
“System” of the “HD422 50/1080/29.97P,”
OTHERS menu is “HD422 50/1080/23.98P,”

Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

set to “1920×1080/ “HQ 1920×1080/29.97P,” or
59.94P” or “HQ 1920×1080/23.98P”
“1920×1080/50P” 1 to 60 (30) (NTSC)
When “Format” is set to
“HD422 50/720/59.94P,”
“HD422 50/720/29.97P,”
“HD422 50/720/23.98P,” or
“HQ 1280×720/59.94P”
1 to 25 (PAL)
When “Format” is set to
“HD422 50/1080/25P” or
“HQ 1920×1080/25P”
1 to 50 (25) (PAL)
When “Format” is set to
“HD422 50/720/50P,”
“HD422 50/720/25P,” or
“HQ 1280×720/50P”
exFAT
1 to 30, 60 (NTSC)
When “Format” is set to
“XAVC-I 1080/29.97P,”
“XAVC-I 1080/23.98P,”
“XAVC-L50 1080/29.97P,”
“XAVC-L50 1080/23.98P,”
“XAVC-L35 1080/29.97P,” or
“XAVC-L35 1080/23.98P”

Setup Menu List 87

 CAMERA SET
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
1 to 30 (NTSC)
When “Format” is set to
“HD422 50/1080/29.97P,”
“HD422 50/1080/23.98P,”
“HQ 1920×1080/29.97P,” or
“HQ 1920×1080/23.98P”
1 to 60 (30) (NTSC)
When “Format” is set to
“XAVC-I 720/59.94P,”
“XAVC-L50 720/59.94P,”
“HD422 50/720/59.94P,”
“HD422 50/720/29.97P,”
“HD422 50/720/23.98P,” or
“HQ 1280×720/59.94P”
1 to 25, 50 (PAL)
When “Format” is set to
“XAVC-I 1080/25P,”
“XAVC-L50 1080/25P,” or
“XAVC-L35 1080/25P”
1 to 25 (PAL)
When “Format” is set to
“HD422 50/1080/25P” or
“HQ 1920×1080/25P”
1 to 50 (25) (PAL)
When “Format” is set to
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

“XAVC-I 720/50P,”
“XAVC-L50 720/50P,”
“HD422 50/720/50P,”
“HD422 50/720/25P,” or
“HQ 1280×720/50P”
FAT
1 to 30 (NTSC)
When “Format” is set to
“HQ 1920×1080/29.97P” or
“HQ 1920×1080/23.98P”
1 to 60 (30) (NTSC)
When “Format” is set to
“HQ 1280×720/59.94P,”
“HQ 1280×720/29.97P,” or
“HQ 1280×720/23.98P”
1 to 30 (25) (PAL)
When “Format” is set to
“HQ 1920×1080/25P”
1 to 60 (25) (PAL)
When “Format” is set to
“HQ 1280×720/50P” or
“HQ 1280×720/25P”
Proxy On / Off Turns the proxy recording on an SD card on/off.
Setting for proxy
recording

88 Setup Menu List

CAMERA SET
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
Rec Review 3 sec / 10 sec / Clip Set the time to play the last recorded clip using the Rec-
Setting the Review function.
playback time for 3 sec: Last 3 seconds
Rec-Review 10 sec: Last 10 seconds
Clip: Entire duration of the clip
TLCS Level Set the target level (to make brighter or darker) of auto iris
Setting the Total +1.0 / +0.5 / ±0 / –0.5 / –1.0 control in TLCS. (This setting also affects the gain control in
Level Control AGC mode and shutter-speed control in Auto Shutter mode.)
System (auto +1.0: Approx. one stop further open
adjustment system +0.5: Approx. half a stop further open
of gain, exposure ±0: Standard
and shutter) –0.5: Approx. half a stop further closed
–1.0: Approx. one stop further closed
Mode Set the auto iris control mode in TLCS.
Backlight / Standard / Backlight: Backlight mode to reduce darkening of the center
Spotlight subject against lights
Standard: Standard mode
Spotlight: Spotlight mode to reduce blown-out highlights on
the center subject in the spotlight
Speed Set the tracing speed of TLCS control.
–99 to +99 (+50)
AGC Turn the AGC (Auto Gain Control) function on/off.
On / Off

Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

AGC Limit Set the maximum gain in AGC.
3 / 6 / 9 / 12 / 18 dB
AGC Point Set the iris point for switching to auto-iris and AGC (Auto
F2.8 / F4 / F5.6 Gain Control) control when AGC is on.
Auto Shutter Turn the Auto Shutter control function on/off.
On / Off
A.SHT Limit Set the maximum shutter speed in Auto Shutter control.
1/100
1/150
1/200
1/250
A.SHT Point Set the exposure position for switching auto iris and auto
F5.6 / F8 / F11 / F16 shutter control when Auto Shutter is on.
Shockless Off / 1 / 2 / 3 Select the speed of change in white balance when the white
White balance mode is switched. Set to “Off” to instantly change the
Setting the white balance.
shockless white Select a larger number to change the white balance more
balance slowly through interpolation.
White Switch ATW / MEM Select the white balance adjustment mode selected at the B
<B> position of the WHITE BAL switch.
Setting for the
WHITE BAL
switch
ATW Speed 1/2/3/4/5 Set the tracing speed of ATW. The larger the number you set,
Setting for Auto the speed becomes faster.
Tracing White
Balance

Setup Menu List 89

 CAMERA SET
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
ATW Mode Natural / Pure Natural: Depending on the brightness of scenes, automatically
ATW mode setting adjusts the white balance to natural ambience.
Pure: Not leaving the blue color or red color, automatically
adjusts the white balance closer to original colors.
Image Normal / H INV / V INV / Normal: Normal image direction
Inversion H+V H INV: To horizontally invert the image
Setting the image V INV: To vertically invert the image
inversion function H+V: To horizontally and vertically invert the image

Notes
• This cannot be set while recording, while the color bars are
displayed or while using Recording Review.
• This cannot be set while the automatic black balance
function is set.
Auto Black Execute / Cancel Turn the automatic black balance function on/off.
Bal.
Notes
Setting the
automatic black • This cannot be set while recording or while the color bars
balance are displayed.
• This cannot be set while using the Picture Cache Recording
mode, the Interval Recording mode, the Frame Recording
mode, the Slow and Quick Motion mode, the Slow Shutter
mode or the Supersensitized Slow Shutter mode.
Auto FB Execute / Cancel Executes the automatic flange focal length adjustment by
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

Adjust selecting “Execute.”

Automatic
Notes
adjustment for the
flange focal length • Execute this function when the video format is set to 59.94i
or 50i.
• Execute this function after setting the ND filter to CLEAR.
“Auto FB Adjust” cannot be selected when the ND filter is
set to 1 or 2. For details, see the steps of the automatic
adjustment for the flange focal length (page 41).

90 Setup Menu List

AUDIO SET Menu

AUDIO SET
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
Audio Input CH3 Input Source Set the audio signal source to be recorded for CH3 for a 4-
Setting for audio Internal / External channel recordable format.
inputs Internal: Record the L side of the internal microphone for
[M] CH3.
External: Record the AUDIO IN CH1 signal for CH3.
CH4 Input Source Set the audio signal source to be recorded for CH4 for a 4-
Internal / External channel recordable format.
Internal: Record the R side of the internal microphone for
CH4.
External: Record the AUDIO IN CH2 signal for CH4.
EXT MIC CH1 Ref Select the reference input level for when an external
–70 dB / –60 dB / –50 dB / microphone is connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1 connector
–40 dB / –30 dB and that signal is being used for the audio signal source for
CH1 or CH3. This can be selected regardless of the setting of
the AUDIO SELECT switch.

Note
This is unavailable when the AUDIO IN CH-1 switch is set to
INT and “CH3 Input Source” is set to “Internal.” This is also
unavailable when the CH-1 input (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V)

Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

switch is set to LINE.
EXT MIC CH2 Ref Select the reference input level for when an external
–70 dB / –60 dB / –50 dB / microphone is connected to the AUDIO IN CH-2 connector
–40 dB / –30 dB and that signal is being used for the audio signal source for
CH2 or CH4. This can be selected regardless of the setting of
the AUDIO SELECT switch.

Note
This is unavailable when the AUDIO IN CH-2 switch is set to
INT and “CH4 Input Source” is set to “Internal.” This is also
unavailable when the CH-2 input (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V)
switch is set to LINE.
INT MIC Level Select the internal microphone level. This can be selected
–12 dB / –6 dB / 0 dB / +6 dB / regardless of the AUDIO SELECT switch setting.
+12 dB
Line Input Ref Select the reference input level for when the AUDIO IN CH-
+4dB / 0dB / –3dB / EBUL 1/CH-2 connectors are set to LINE.
Reference Level Select the 1kHz test signal output level.
–20dB / –18dB / –16dB /
–12dB / EBUL
Limiter Mode Select whether to activate the limiter when a loud signal is
Off / –6 dB / –9 dB / –12 dB / input while the AUDIO SELECT switch is set to MANU
–15 dB / –17 dB (manual).
AGC Spec Select the audio input level AGC.
–6 dB / –9 dB / –12 dB /
–15 dB / –17 dB

Setup Menu List 91

 AUDIO SET
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
CH1&2 AGC Mode Select auto tuning for the input level of an analog audio signal
Mono / Stereo recorded to CH-1/CH-2.
Mono: Perform for each channel.
Stereo: Perform in stereo mode.
CH3&4 AGC Mode Select auto tuning for the input level of an analog audio signal
Mono / Stereo / Off recorded to CH-3 or CH-4.
Mono: Perform for each channel.
Stereo: Perform in stereo mode.
Off: Do not perform auto tuning. The Limiter Mode setting is
applied.
1KHz Tone Turn the 1-kHz reference tone signal on/off.
On / Off
Wind Filter CH-1 Turn the wind filter for CH1 on/off.
On / Off
Wind Filter CH-2 Turn the wind filter for CH2 on/off.
On / Off
Wind Filter CH-3 Turn the wind filter for CH3 on/off.
On / Off
Wind Filter CH-4 Turn the wind filter for CH4 on/off.
On / Off
EXT CH Select CH-1: To record the CH1 external input signal to both CH-1
CH-1 and CH2 (when the CH-2 AUDIO IN switch is set to
CH-1/CH-2 EXT). If “CH4 Input Source” is set to “External,” you can
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

also record to CH4.

CH-1/CH-2: To record each external input signal to its
respective channel.
Audio Output Monitor CH Select the audio channel(s) to be fed to the headphones and
Setting for audio CH-1/CH-2 (CH-3/CH-4) the built-in speaker.
outputs CH-1+CH-2 (CH-3+CH-4) CH-1/CH-2 (CH-3/CH-4): Stereo
CH-1 (CH-3) CH-1+CH-2 (CH-3+CH-4): Mix
CH-2 (CH-4) CH-1 (CH-3): CH-1 (CH-3) only
CH-2 (CH-4): CH-2 (CH-4) only
( ): with Output CH set to “CH-3/CH-4”
Output CH Select audio output channels from either channels 1 and 2 or
CH-1/CH-2 channels 3 and 4.
CH-3/CH-4
Alarm Level Set the alarm sound volume.
0 to 7 (4)
Beep Select whether or not to sound a beep upon each operation.
On / Off

92 Setup Menu List

VIDEO SET Menu

VIDEO SET
Menu items Setting values Contents
Input Source Camera / i.LINK Select video and audio signal for the input source.
Select Camera: Camera image
Setting the input i.LINK: HDV/DVCAM input via the i.LINK (HDV/DV)
source connector

Notes
• “i.LINK” is unavailable for UDF or exFAT.
• “i.LINK” is unavailable when “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” is set
to “Wi-Fi&Proxy.”
SDI/HDMI/ When using exFAT HD Mode 3G SDI & HD HDMI: To output 3G SDI signals from the
i.LINK I/O 3G SDI & HD HDMI SDI OUT connector, and HD HDMI signals from the
Select HD SDI & HD HDMI HDMI OUT connector.
Selecting input/ SD SDI & SD HDMI i HD SDI & HD HDMI: To output HD SDI signals from the
output signals for SD HDMI P SDI OUT connector, and HD HDMI signals from the
the connectors Off HDMI OUT connector.
When using UDF HD Mode SD SDI & SD HDMI i: To output SD SDI signals from the
HD SDI & HD HDMI SDI OUT connector, and SD HDMI interlace signals from
SD SDI & SD HDMI i the HDMI OUT connector.
SD HDMI P HD HDMI & HDV: To output HD HDMI signals from the
Off HDMI OUT connector, and input/output HDV streams
When using FAT HD Mode (HQ) from the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector.

Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

HD SDI & HD HDMI SD HDMI i & HDV: To output SD HDMI interlace signals
SD SDI & SD HDMI i from the HDMI OUT connector, and input/output HDV
SD HDMI i & DVCAM streams from the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector.
SD HDMI P SD HDMI P & HDV: To output SD HDMI progressive
Off signals from the HDMI OUT connector, and input/output
When using FAT HD Mode (SP) HDV streams from the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector.
HD SDI & HD HDMI SD HDMI i & DVCAM: To output SD HDMI interlace
SD SDI & SD HDMI i signals from the HDMI OUT connector, and input/output
HD HDMI & HDV DVCAM streams from the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector.
SD HDMI i & HDV SD HDMI P: To output SD HDMI progressive signals from
SD HDMI P & HDV the HDMI OUT connector.
SD HDMI i & DVCAM Off: There is no output from the SDI OUT/HDMI OUT/
Off i.LINK connectors.
When using exFAT SD Mode or
UDF SD Mode Notes
SD SDI & SD HDMI i • Signals are not output from the SDI OUT connector when
Off this is set to other than an HD SDI or SD SDI setting.
When using FAT SD Mode • Slow & Quick Motion mode cannot be used when this is
SD SDI & SD HDMI i set to input/output DVCAM streams.
SD HDMI i & DVCAM • When “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” is set to “Wi-Fi&Proxy,”
Off signals are not output from the HDMI OUT, VIDEO OUT,
and A/V OUT connector, and signals are not input/output
from the i.LINK connector.
• When “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” is set to “Wi-Fi&Proxy,”
“SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” is set to the following
setting automatically and cannot be selected.
—For exFAT HD, UDF HD, FAT HD: “HD SDI & HD
HDMI”
—For exFAT SD, UDF SD, FAT SD: “SD SDI & SD
HDMI i”

Setup Menu List 93

 VIDEO SET
Menu items Setting values Contents
3G SDI OUT LevelA / LevelB Select the data mapping method for the 3G SDI output
Level A/B signals.
Setting the method
Memo
of the 3G SDI
output signals • This setting is available when “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O
Select” is set to “3G SDI & HD HDMI.”
• “LevelA” will be compatible in future upgrades.
SDI/HDMI/ On / Off Set whether to add the menus and status indications of the
Video Out LCD monitor/EVF screen to the output of the SDI OUT,
Super HDMI OUT, VIDEO OUT, and A/V OUT connectors.
Setting the
Notes
character
information for • This setting for each output is not available when “Format”
each output in “System” is set to 1920×1080/59.94P, 50P and “SDI/
HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” is set to “3G SDI&HD HDMI.”
• When “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” is set to “Wi-Fi&Proxy,” “SDI/
HDMI/Video Out Super” is set to “Off” automatically, and
cannot be selected. The menus and status indications of the
LCD monitor/EVF screen are not added.
• On the thumbnail, EXPAND CLIP, and SHOT MARK
screens, the menus and status indications on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen are displayed regardless of the setting
of this item.
Down Squeeze / Letterbox / Edge Set the output mode (aspect) for SD signals
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

Converter Crop Squeeze: To horizontally reduce a 16:9 picture to output a 4:3

Selecting the picture
operation mode of Letterbox: To mask the upper and lower areas of a 4:3 picture
the down converter to display a 16:9 picture in the center of the screen
Edge Crop: To cut the both sides of a 16:9 picture to output a
4:3 picture
23.98P Output 59.94i (2-3 Pull Down)/ Select the video output format when the video format is the
Selecting Output 23.98PsF following setting.
mode • For UDF HD Mode:
HD422 50/1080/23.98P
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P
• For exFAT HD Mode:
XAVC-I 1080/23.98P
XAVC-L50 1080/23.98P
XAVC-L35 1080/23.98P
HD422 50/1080/23.98P
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P
• For FAT HD Mode:
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P

Note
When “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” is set to “Wi-Fi&Proxy,” the
video output format is set to 23.98PsF automatically for the
above format settings.

94 Setup Menu List

VIDEO SET
Menu items Setting values Contents
SDI Rec Off / HD SDI Remote I/F To turn the function to enabling recording synchronized with
Control this camcorder.
Setting the SDI HD SDI Remote I/F: To feed a REC trigger signal to a
recording control recorder connected to the SDI OUT connector.
Match Clip On / Off Set whether to add the clip name information to the SDI
Name output.

Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

Setup Menu List 95

 LCD/VF SET Menu

LCD/VF SET
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
LCD Color Adjust the color of pictures on the LCD monitor.
Adjusting the LCD –99 to +99 (±0)
monitor Contrast Adjust the contrast of pictures on the LCD monitor.
–99 to +99 (±0)
Brightness Adjust the brightness of pictures on the LCD monitor.
–99 to +99 (±0)
EVF Backlight Select the brightness of the EVF backlight.
Setting the High / Low
viewfinder Mode Select the display mode of the EVF while recording (or
Color / B&W standing by to record).
Color: Color mode
B&W: Monochrome mode
Contrast Adjust the contrast of pictures on the EVF screen.
–99 to +99 (±0)
Brightness Adjust the brightness of pictures on the EVF screen.
–99 to +99 (+30)
Power Set the condition to turn the EVF on.
Auto / On Auto: To turn it on when the LCD monitor is closed or rotated
to the upside-down position.
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

On: To keep it on regardless of the status of the LCD monitor.

Note
When “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” is set to “Wi-Fi&Proxy,” this
setting is set to “Auto” automatically and cannot be selected.
This setting is set to “Off” automatically when the LCD
monitor is rotated to the upside-down position.
Peaking Setting Turn the peaking function on/off.
Setting the peaking On / Off
function for the Color Select the color of the peaking signal.
LCD monitor/EVF White / Red / Yellow / Blue
[M] Level Set the level of the peaking signal.
High / Mid / Low

96 Setup Menu List

LCD/VF SET
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
Marker Setting Turn all marker indications on/off in combination.
Setting the On / Off
markers added to Safety Zone Turn the safety zone marker on/off.
pictures on the On / Off
LCD monitor/EVF
Safety Area Select the size (ratio to the entire screen) of the safety zone
screen
80% / 90% / 92.5% / 95% marker.
[M]
Center Marker Turn the center marker on/off.
On / Off
Aspect Marker Select the aspect marker.
Line / Mask / Off Line: To show white lines
Mask: To lower the video signal level of areas outside the
marker range.
Off: To not display

Note
No aspect marker is displayed when a video format of EC
(Edge Crop) is selected in SD Mode.
Aspect Select Select the ratio of the aspect marker.
4:3 / 13:9 / 14:9 / 15:9 / 1.66:1 /
1.85:1 / 2.35:1 / 2.4:1
Aspect Mask When “Aspect Marker” is “Mask,” select the brightness of
90% / 80% / 70% / 60% / 50% / images outside the aspect marker.
40% / 30% / 20% / 10% / 0%

Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

Guide Frame Turn the guide frame marker on/off.
On / Off
Zebra Setting Turn the zebra function on/off.
Setting the zebra On / Off
pattern Zebra Select Select the zebra pattern(s) to be displayed.
[M] 1 / 2 / Both 1: To display only Zebra1 (the default is 70%) for an area
within ±10% of the “Zebra1 Level” video level.
2: To display only Zebra2 (the default is 100%) for a video
level over 100%.
Both: To display both zebra 1 and zebra 2
Zebra1 Level Set the display level of zebra 1.
50 to 107 (70)
Display On/Off Video Level Warnings Turn the warning indication to be displayed when the picture
Selecting the items On / Off is too bright or too dark on/off.
to be displayed on Sending Clip Info Display the uploading status of a clip while connected with
the LCD monitor/ On / Off the wireless LAN.
EVF screen
Brightness Display Turn the numeric indication to show the picture brightness on/
[M] On / Off off.
Histogram Display Turn the histogram indication to show the level distribution of
On / Off the picture on/off.
Lens Info Select the depth-of-field indication.
Meter / Feet / Off Meter: To indicate in meters
Feet: To indicate in feet
Off: To not indicate
Zoom Position Select the type of zoom position indication.
Number / Bar / Off Number: Indication with a number
Bar: Indication with a bar
Off: To not display

Setup Menu List 97

 LCD/VF SET
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
Audio Level Meter Turn the audio level meter indication on/off.
On / Off
Timecode Turn the time data (timecode, user bits, duration) indication
On / Off on/off.
Battery Remain Turn the battery remaining/DC input voltage indication on/
On / Off off.
Media Remain Turn the media remaining indication on/off.
On / Off
TLCS Mode Turn the TLCS mode indication on/off.
On / Off
Steady Shot Turn the Steady Shot indication on/off.
On / Off
Focus Mode Turn the focus operation mode indication on/off.
On / Off
White Balance Mode Turn the white balance mode indication on/off.
On / Off
Picture Profile Turn the Picture Profile indication on/off.
On / Off
Filter Position Turn the ND filter setting indication on/off.
On / Off
Iris Position Turn the iris setting indication on/off.
On / Off
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

Gain Setting Turn the gain setting indication on/off.

On / Off
Shutter Setting Turn the shutter mode and speed indication on/off.
On / Off
Rec Mode Turn the special recording mode (Frame Rec, Interval Rec,
On / Off S&Q Motion) indication on/off.
Video Format Turn the video format indication on/off.
On / Off
Clip Name Turn the clip name display on/off.
On / Off
ClipNumber (PB) Turn the clip number display on/off.
On / Off
SDI Rec Control Turn the synchronous recording display (the Rec2/Rec2-P
On / Off display) on/off.
When “HD SDI Remote I/F” is selected: “Rec2” is displayed.
When “Proxy” is set to “On”: “Rec2-P” is displayed.
Wide Conversion Turn the wide Conversion setting indication on/off.
On / Off
Wireless Status Turn the status of radio wave on/off while connecting with the
On / Off wireless LAN.
SD Card Remain Turn the remaining time indication for the SD card in the
On / Off camcorder on/off.

98 Setup Menu List

TC/UB SET Menu

TC/UB SET
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
Timecode Mode Set the timecode mode.
Setting the Preset / Regen / Clock Preset: To start the timecode from the specified value
timecode Regen (regeneration): To continue the timecode during
recording only. When you insert another SxS memory
card, the camcorder starts next recording so that the
timecode continues from the last recorded timecode on the
card.
Clock: To use the current clock time as the timecode

Notes
• In Interval Recording, Frame Recording and Slow & Quick
Motion Recording, if you set “Mode” to “Preset” the
timecode advances in Rec Run mode regardless of the
“Run” setting. If you set it to “Clock,” the timecode
advances in Regen mode.
• When the Picture Cache function (page 39) is active
(“Setting” of “P.Cache Rec” is set to “On”), the timecode
always advances in Free Run mode. When the Picture
Cache Recording function is deactivated, the running mode
is restored to the selected mode.
Run Set the running mode when the timecode mode is set to

Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

Rec Run / Free Run “Preset.”
Rec Run: To advance the timecode during recording only. The
continuity of the timecode is maintained between clips in
the sequence of recording as long as the SxS memory card
is not changed. If you remove the memory card and record
on another card, the timecode will not continue when you
return the first card to the slot again.
Free Run: The timecode keeps advancing regardless of the
state of recording to the SxS memory card.
Setting Set the timecode to a desired value.
Reset Select “Execute” to reset the timecode to 00:00:00:00.
Execute / Cancel
TC Out Select the timecode output.
Auto / Generator Auto: To output the timecode generator value during
recording, and the timecode reader value during playback.
Generator: To output the timecode generator value during
recording or playback.
Users Bit Mode Set the user bit mode.
Setting the user Fix / Date Fix: To use a desired fixed value as the user bits
bits Date: To use the current date
Setting Set the user bits to a desired value.

Setup Menu List 99

 TC/UB SET
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
TC Format DF / NDF Set the timecode format.
Setting the time DF: Drop frame
code format NDF: Non drop frame

Note
The current video format/frame frequency determines
whether the mode is fixed either to DF or NDF (see below),
regardless of the TC Format setting.

1) With DF, the frame digits can be set as desired in the range
Video formats Frame TC Format of 00 to 29.
setting With NDF, the frame at the beginning of recording is
59.94i 00 to 29 DF/NDF limited to 00, 05, 10, 15, 20, or 25.
59.94P switchable 2) The frame digits in “Setting” is limited to 00, 04, 08, 12, 16,
29.97P (Fixed to DF in and 20.
23.98P 1) Clock mode) The frame at the beginning of recording is limited to 00, 04,
SP 1440×1080/ 08, 12, 16, or 20.
23.98P (FAT) As “23.98P Output” (page 94) of the VIDEO SET menu
HQ 1280×720/ becomes 2-3 pull-down 59.94i when recording (or standing
23.98P (UDF) by to record) HQ 1920×1080/23.98P other than when
23.98P “23.98PsF” is selected, the overlapping timecodes of frames
00 to 23 2) Fixed to NDF 3)
XAVC-I 1080/ output from the SDI OUT connector are renumbered from
23.98P 00 to 29.
XAVC-L50 1080/ 3) Even in Clock mode, the timecode is gradually shifted,
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

23.98P because it is counted by NDF.

XAVC-L35 1080/ As output from the SDI OUT connector becomes 2-3
23.98P pulled-down video when recording (or standing by to
HD422 50/1080/ record) HQ 1920×1080/23.98P and other than “23.98PsF”
23.98P is selected for “23.98P Output” (page 94) of the VIDEO
HD422 50/720/ SET menu, fields are created in which overlapping
23.98P timecodes are displayed on the screen.
HQ 1920×1080/
23.98P
HQ 1440×1080/
23.98P
HQ 1280×720/
23.98P (FAT)
50i 00 to 24 Fixed to NDF
50P
25P

100 Setup Menu List

OTHERS Menu

OTHERS
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
All Reset Execute/Cancel Select “Execute” to reset the camcorder to the factory status.
Resetting to the
factory status
Network Reset Execute/Cancel Resets the network settings to the factory status.
Resetting the
Memo
network settings to
the factory status This setting is available when “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” is set to
“Wi-Fi&Proxy.”
Camera Data Store When you select “Execute” to store the setting values to an
Storing/recalling Execute/Cancel SxS memory card, the setup file is stored to one of the
the menu settings following directories.
to an SxS memory For UDF: /General/Sony/PRO/CAMERA/XDCAM/
card or USB flash PXW_X200/
drive For exFAT: /XDROOT/General/Sony/PRO/CAMERA/
XDCAM/PXW_X200/
For FAT: /SONY/PRO/CAMERA/XDCAM_EX/
PXW_X200/
Recall Select “Execute” to retrieve the setting values from an SxS
Execute/Cancel memory card.
All Save (USB) When you select “Execute” to store the setting values to a

Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

Execute/Cancel USB flash drive, the setup file is stored to the following
directory.
/MSSONY/SONY/PRO/CAMERA/XDCAM/PXW_X200/
All Load (USB) Select “Execute” to retrieve the setting values from a USB
Execute/Cancel flash drive.
Time Zone UTC –12:00 to +13:30 Set the time-zone difference from UTC in steps of 30
Setting the time minutes.
difference
Note
The default setting is different among the sales areas.
United States and Canada: –5:00
Europe area: 0:00
Oceania: +10:00
Clock Set Date/Time Set the current time and date.
Setting the built-in 12H/24H Select the display mode of time.
clock 12H / 24H 12H: 12-hour mode
24H: 24-hour mode
Date Mode Select the display mode of the date.
YYMMDD / MMDDYY / YYMMDD: In sequence of year, month, day
DDMMYY MMDDYY: In sequence of month, day, year
DDMMYY: In sequence of day, month, year

Setup Menu List 101

 OTHERS
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
Language English / Chinese / Spanish / English: To display in English
Selecting the Portuguese / Russian / Chinese: To display in Chinese
language for Indonesian Spanish: To display in Spanish
menus and Portuguese: To display in Portuguese
messages Russian: To display in Russian
Indonesian: To display in Indonesian

Note
Language for menus and messages differ depending on
countries and regions.
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

102 Setup Menu List

OTHERS
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
Assign Button <1> to <5> Assign a function to the ASSIGN buttons 1/2/3/4/5. (The
Assigning Off / Zebra / Peaking / Marker / selectable functions are shared.)
functions to the Last Clip DEL / ATW / ATW Off: No function
assignable buttons Hold / Rec Review / Rec / Zebra: For turning the zebra function on/off
Picture Cache / Freeze Mix / Peaking: For turning the peaking function on/off
Focus Magnifier / Spotlight / Marker: For turning the safety zone, center marker, aspect
Backlight / IR Remote / Shot marker and guide frame functions on/off as a group
Mark1 / Shot Mark2 / VF Mode Last Clip DEL: For executing the last clip delete (retake)
/ BRT Disp / Histogram / Lens function
Info / OK Mark / Clip Flag OK / ATW: For turning the ATW function on/off
Clip Flag NG / Clip Flag Keep / ATW Hold: For turning the ATW hold function on/off
Clip Continuous Rec / LCD/VF Rec Review: For executing the recording review function
Adjust / Color Bars / One Push Rec: For starting/stopping recording
Auto Iris / Handle Zoom / NFC Picture Cache: For turning the Picture Cache Recording
<1> Zebra function on/off
<2> Peaking Freeze Mix: For executing the freeze mix function
<3> Off Focus Magnifier: For turning the expanded focus function on/
<4> Off off
<5> Off Spotlight: For enabling and disabling TLCS Spotlight mode
Backlight: For enabling and disabling TLCS Backlight mode
IR Remote: For activating/deactivating the IR Remote
Commander
Shot Mark1: For adding shot mark 1 (HD Mode only)
Shot Mark2: For adding shot mark 2 (HD Mode only)
VF Mode: For switching between color and monochrome for

Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

the EVF screen
BRT Disp: For turning the brightness level indication function
on/off
Histogram: For turning the histogram indication function on/
off
Lens Info: For switching the depth-of-field indication to
“Off”/“Meter”/“Feet”
OK Mark: For adding or removing an OK mark (HD Mode
only, not valid via the thumbnail screen)
Clip Flag OK: For enabling and disabling OK flags for clips
during recording and playback (UDF only)
Clip Flag NG: For enabling and disabling NG flags for clips
during recording and playback (UDF only)
Clip Flag Keep: For enabling and disabling Keep flags for
clips during recording and playback (UDF only)
Clip Continuous Rec: For turning the Clip Continuous
Recording function on/off
LCD/VF Adjust: For switching the LCD/VF Adjust function
level bar indication (LCD brightness adjustment t LCD
contrast adjustment t VF brightness adjustment t VF
contrast adjustment t off)
Color Bars: For switching between the color bar and camera
signal
One Push Auto Iris: For executing the One Push iris function.
Handle Zoom: For switching the handle zoom operation.
NFC: For executing the NFC function.
Tally Front Set the brightness of the tally lamp.
Setting the tally High / Low / Off High: To brighten the lamp
lamps Low: To dim the lamp
Off: To not light the lamp

Setup Menu List 103

 OTHERS
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
Hours Meter Hours (Sys) The non-resettable accumulated time of use is displayed.
Displaying the Hours (Reset) The resettable accumulated time of use is displayed.
hours meter
Reset Select “Execute” to reset the Hours (Reset) value to 0.
Execute/Cancel
IR Remote On / Off Set to “On” to activate remote control operations from the
Activating/ supplied IR Remote Commander.
deactivating the
Note
Remote
Commander The setting automatically returns to “Off” when the
camcorder is turned off.
Battery Alarm Low BATT Set the battery level at which the Low BATT warning is
Setting the low 5% / 10% / 15% / ... / 45% / generated (in steps of 5%).
power alarm 50%
BATT Empty Set the battery level at which the BATT Empty warning is
3% to 7% (3%) generated.
DC Low Volt1 Set the DC IN voltage at which the DC Low Volt1 warning is
11.5 V to 17.0 V (11.5 V) generated.
DC Low Volt2 Set the DC IN voltage at which the DC Low Volt2 warning is
11.0 V to 14.0 V (11.0 V) generated.
Battery INFO Type The type (product name) is displayed.
Showing MFG Date The date of manufacture is displayed.
information
Charge Count The accumulated number of times of charge/discharge is
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

regarding the
displayed.
battery pack
(display only) Capacity The estimated total capacity of full charge is displayed.
Voltage The current output voltage is displayed.
Remaining The current remaining level is displayed.
Genlock H Phase (HD) Set the H phase (phase of the horizontal sync signal) of HD
Setting Genlock –999 to +999 (±0) signal for Genlock operation.
operation H Phase (SD) Set the H phase (phase of the horizontal sync signal) of SD
–99 to +99 (±0) signal for Genlock operation.
Direct Menu All / Part / Off All: All Direct menu operations are permitted.
Setting the Direct Part: A part of Direct menu operations is permitted. The
menu function operation is limited depending on the GAIN, SHUTTER,
or WHITE BAL switch setting.
Off: No Direct menu operation is permitted.
Trigger Mode Internal / Both / External Internal: To activate recording start/stop operations only for
Setting for an SxS memory card in a built-in slot.
operating an Both: To activate recording start/stop operations both for an
external recording SxS memory card in a built-in slot and the external
device connected recording device connected via the i.LINK connector.
via the i.LINK External: To activate recording start/stop operations only for
connector (FAT the external recording device connected via the i.LINK
only) connector.
[M]

104 Setup Menu List

OTHERS
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
System Country Select the area of use and setup ON/OFF setting.
NTSC Area / NTSC(J) Area / NTSC Area: Setup ON
PAL Area NTSC(J) Area: Setup OFF
PAL Area: Setup OFF

Note
The default setting is different among the sales areas.
United States and Canada: NTSC Area
Other areas: PAL Area
F.Sys. Switch the file system between UDF/exFAT/FAT.
UDF / exFAT / FAT
HD/SD Switch between HD Mode and SD Mode.
HD / SD
XAVC/MPEG2 Switch between XAVC and MPEG2 format for exFAT HD
XAVC / MPEG2 Mode.
Format Select the video format for recording.
HD Mode
• Bit rate
UDF: HD422 50 or HD420 HQ
exFAT: XAVC, HD422 50, or HD420 HQ
FAT: HQ or SP
• Horizontal resolution
1920, 1440, or 1280

Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

• Frame rate
23.98, 25, 29.97, 50, or 59.94
• Scan system
i (interlace) or P (progressive)
SD Mode
• Frame rate
25, 29.97, 50, or 59.94
• Scan system
i (interlace) or P (progressive)
• Aspect
SQ (Squeeze) or EC (Edge Crop)
For about the video format that can be selected for each
mode, see “Video Format (Format)” (page 122).
Notes
• When “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” is set to “Wi-Fi&Proxy” or
“USB A,” “1920×1080/59.94P” and “1920×1080/50P”
cannot be selected.
• When setting to “1920×1080/59.94P” or “1920×1080/50P,”
signals are not output from the A/V OUT and VIDEO OUT
connectors.

Setup Menu List 105

 OTHERS
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
Clip Auto Naming Select the method to specify clip names.
Setting for clip C**** / Title / Plan C****: UDF, exFAT
name or deletion Title: To specify as desired by “Title Prefix”
Plan: To use a name specified in planning metadata (if no
name is specified in planning metadata, the name
specified by “Title Prefix” is used.)
Title Prefix Call the Character Set screen to set the title part (4 to 46
nnn_ (nnn=least three digits of characters) of the clip names.
the serial number) Configuration of the Character Set screen
(Max. 7 characters displayed) Character selection area (3 lines):
To select a character to insert in the cursor position of the
Title Prefix area.
!#$%()+,-.;=@[]^_~0123456789
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Cursor operation area (1 line):
Space: To change the character in the cursor position to a
space
INS: To insert a space in the cursor position
DEL: To delete a character in the cursor position
T: To move the cursor to the left
t: To move the cursor to the right
ESC: To cancel the change and exit the Character Set
screen
END: To validate the change and exit the Character Set
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

screen
Title Prefix area (1 line):
For entering the title
To set the title
1 Using the up/down/left/right buttons, select (highlight) a
character in the character selection area to be entered in the
cursor position of the Title Prefix area. Then press the SEL/
SET button or the jog dial. (The selected character is
entered, and the cursor is moved to the right.)
2 Repeat Step 1 for setting the title. (Use Space, INS, and
DEL as required.)
3 When the title setting is completed, select END to exit the
Character Set screen.
Number Set Set the second 4-numeric part of the clip name.
0001 to 9999 Set a five-digit number for a planning metadata file.
Update To update the managerial file on the SxS memory card in the
Media(A) / Media(B) selected slot.1)
Last Clip DEL Select “Execute” to delete the last recorded clip.
Execute / Cancel
All Clips DEL Select “Execute” to delete all clips on the active SxS memory
Execute / Cancel card.

Note
Clips to which you applied OK mark and clips that are locked
cannot be deleted.
Filter Clips Select from among OK (the OK flag), NG (the not good flag),
OK / NG / KP / None KP (the keep flag), or None (for no flag) to filter displayed
clips. (UDF, exFAT)

106 Setup Menu List

OTHERS
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
Lock All Clips Select “Execute” to protect all clips. (UDF, exFAT)
Execute/Cancel
Unlock All Clips Select “Execute” to remove protection from all clips. (UDF,
Execute/Cancel exFAT)
Index Picture Pos Set the image for viewing thumbnails. This selects the time
0sec to 10sec (0sec) difference from the start of the clip.
Find Mode Set the action for when you press the PREV button/NEXT
Clip / Rec Start button. (UDF, exFAT)
Clip: Move to the start of the current clip/next clip. (Pressing
the PREV button from the start of a clip will move to the
start of the previous clip.)
Rec Start: Move to the previous Rec Start Essence Mark/the
next Rec Start Essence Mark.
Copy All 2) Clips To copy all clips on an SxS memory card to the other.
Setting for General Files To copy all files in the General folder on an SxS memory card
collective copy of to the other.
clips and/or
Clips&General To copy all clips and files in the General folder on an SxS
General files
memory card to the other.
Format Media Media(A) Select “Execute” to format the SxS memory card in slot A
Formatting SxS Execute / Cancel with the selected file system (UDF/exFAT/FAT).
memory cards Media(B) Select “Execute” to format the SxS memory card in slot B
Execute / Cancel with the selected file system (UDF/exFAT/FAT).

Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

Setup Menu List 107

 OTHERS
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
Plan.Metadata Load/Slot(A) or Load/Slot(B) To load planning metadata from the SxS memory card in slot
Setting planning Execute / Cancel A or B.
metadata Selecting “Execute” displays the list of the planning metadata
files stored on the SxS memory card in slot A or B. Specify a
file, select “Load” then “Execute” for loading.

Notes
• The file list displays up to 64 files. Even if the total number
of planning metadata files is 64 or less, all of the planning
metadata files may not appear if the directory where they
are located in the SxS memory card (General/Sony/
Planning) contains 512 or more files.
• After you start loading, do not remove the SxS memory
card until the completion message is displayed.
Load/USB Loads planning metadata from the USB flash drive connected
(in UDF or exFAT) to the external device connector.
Execute / Cancel Select “Execute” to show the list of the planning metadata
files stored in the USB flash drive and select a file to be
loaded.
Properties Select “Execute” to display the detailed information of the
Execute / Cancel planning metadata loaded in the camcorder.
File Name: Filename
Assign ID: Assignment ID
Created: Time and date of creation
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

Modified: Time and date of most recent modification

Modified by: Name of person who modified the file
Title1: Title1 specified in file (clip name in ASCII format)
Title2: Title2 specified in file (clip name in UTF-8 format)
Material Gp: Number of material groups (groups of clips
recorded using the same planning metadata)
Shot Mark1: Name defined for Shot Mark 1
Shot Mark2: Name defined for Shot Mark 2
When you select “File Name,” “Assign ID,” “Title1,” or
“Title2” on the Planning Metadata Properties screen and then
press the SEL/SET button or the jog dial, the selected item is
displayed on the full screen, permitting you to check a long
file or clip name at a glance.

Note
Names of shot marks cannot be displayed on the full screen
even if you select Shot Mark1 or Shot Mark2.
Clear Select “Execute” to clear the planning metadata loaded in the
Execute / Cancel camcorder.
Clip Name Disp Select the display mode of the clip name specified in planning
Title1 (ASCII) / Title2 (UTF-8) metadata.

Note
When both an ASCII format name and a UTF-8 format name
are specified in planning metadata, the UTF-8 format string is
used as the clip name. If only either ASCII-format name or
UTF-8 format name is specified in planning metadata, the
specified name is displayed regardless of the menu setting.

108 Setup Menu List

OTHERS
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
Network Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB Sets the wireless LAN connection and external device
Settings and Wi-Fi&Proxy / USB A / Off connection.
display for Wi-Fi&Proxy: Activates the wireless LAN connection.
wireless LAN USB A: Activates the external device connection.
connection Off: Deactivates the wireless LAN connection and external
device connection.
Wi-Fi Func. Mode Sets the operation mode for the wireless LAN connection.
Access Point / Station / Off
Wi-Fi Remote Select “On” when using the Wi-Fi remote commander.
On / Off
NFC Starts the easy connection by the NFC function.
Execute / Cancel
WPS Starts Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS).
Execute / Cancel
SSID&Key Displays the SSID and key (password).
Regenerate Key Regenerates the key (password).
Execute / Cancel
Channel Sets the channel for wireless LAN.
Auto / CH1 to CH13
IP Address Displays the IP address of the camcorder.
User Name Sets a desired user name in 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters.
(admin)

Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

Password Sets a password in 0 to 31 alphanumeric characters.
(pxw-x200)
Note
Each password character is displayed as “ * .”
Wi-Fi Version Displays the version for the wireless LAN connecting
function of the camcorder.
Wi-Fi Version Up Upgrades the version for the wireless LAN connecting
Execute / Cancel function of the camcorder.

Notes
• Do not turn the camcorder off while updating.
• This item cannot be selected when an SD card is not
inserted.
Proxy File Size Selects the size for the Proxy recording format.
Setting the proxy 1280×720(9Mbps)
recording 640×360(3Mbps)
480×270(1Mbps)
480×270(0.5Mbps)
Format SD Card Executes formatting of an SD card.
Execute / Cancel
Fan Control Setting Sets the fan control mode.
Setting the fan Auto / Off in Rec Auto: Controls the fan automatically in response to changes
control mode in temperature.
Off in Rec: Turn off the fan while recording. (If temperature
is excessively high, the fan is turned on automatically.)
Version Vx.xx The current software version of the camcorder is displayed.
Showing the
version of this unit

Setup Menu List 109

 OTHERS
Menu items Subitems and setting values Contents
Version Up Execute / Cancel Select “Execute” to update the camcorder.
Updating this unit Use when updating is required.

Note
This item cannot be selected when no SxS memory card has
been loaded.
Menu Scroll Normal / Loop Select the method for menu scrolling.
Setting the menu Normal: The cursor moves and stops at the top or the bottom.
scroll operation Loop: The cursor continues moving up (jumping from the top
to the bottom) or down (jumping from the bottom to the
top).

1) If recording/playback cannot be made with an SxS 2) When you copy an SxS memory card including
memory card because it has been operated with a multiple clips and files to another card with the same
device other than this camcorder, or for some other capacity, all the clips and files may not be copied
reason, updating the managerial file on the card may completely to the end, depending on the usage
improve the situation. conditions or memory properties.
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings

110 Setup Menu List

 Connecting External Devices
Connecting External Monitors and Recording Devices
To display recording/playback pictures on an device connected via the SDI OUT connector. To
external monitor, select the output signal and use enable synchronized recording, set “SDI Rec
an appropriate cable for the monitor to be Control” (page 95) of the VIDEO SET menu to
connected. “HD SDI Remote I/F.”
Output signal from the camcorder can be
Notes
recorded when a recording device is connected.
Regardless of whether the signal is HD or SD, the • If you set “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the
VIDEO SET menu to other than “3G SDI & HD
same status information and menus can be HDMI,” “HD SDI & HD HDMI,” or “SD SDI & SD
displayed on the external monitor as those on the HDMI i” and use the HDMI OUT connector and
LCD monitor/EVF screen. i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector, no signal will be output
According to the signal fed to the monitor, set from the SDI OUT connector.
• When a connected external device does not correspond
“SDI/HDMI/Video Out Super” (page 94) of the to a REC trigger signal, the device cannot be operated.
VIDEO SET menu to “On.” • When “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” is set to “Wi-Fi&Proxy,”
When outputting SD signals in HD Mode, select “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” cannot be selected.
in advance the output mode (Squeeze, Letterbox, • Level A for 3G SDI signals will be compatible in
or Edge Crop) with “Down Converter” (page 94) future upgrades.
of the VIDEO SET menu.
HDMI OUT connector (Type A connector)
Note
SD signals down-converted for output have the
Signal output from this connector is enabled by
following restrictions: setting “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” (page 93)
Images of 50P/50i/25P are output as PAL signals, those of the VIDEO SET menu.
of 59.94P/59.94i/29.97P are output as NTSC signals, and In HD Mode, you can select HD HDMI, SD
those of 23.98P are output as 2-3 pulled-down NTSC
signals.
HDMI interlace, or SD HDMI Progressive
output.
SDI OUT connector (BNC type) In SD Mode, only an SD HDMI interlace signal

Connecting External Devices

can be output.
The camcorder is compatible with 3G SDI, and Use a commercially available HDMI cable for
3G output for 59.94P/50P is enabled in exFAT connection.
HD Mode. (When the format is set to a setting
other than 59.94P/50P, HD signals are output Note
even if “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” is set to When “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” is set to “Wi-Fi&Proxy,”
“3G SDI & HD HDMI.”) signals are not output from the HDMI OUT connector.
The connector is set at the factory to output an HD
SDI signal. VIDEO OUT connector (BNC type)
When you set the camcorder to SD Mode, the By changing the setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/
connector outputs an SD SDI signal. O Select” (page 93) of the VIDEO SET menu,
Set “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” (page 93) of you can output HD-Y signals in HD Mode or
the VIDEO SET menu to “SD SDI & SD HDMI down-converted SD analog composite signals for
i” to output down-converted SD SDI signals for monitoring in SD Mode.
monitoring, even in HD Mode. Use a Use a commercially available BNC cable for
commercially available 75-ohm coaxial cable for connection.
connection.
Note
To start recording on an external device in
Signals are not output from the VIDEO OUT connector
synchronization during the following settings
With HD SDI signal output selected, • When “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” is set to “Wi-Fi&Proxy”
synchronized recording is possible by feeding a or “USB A.”
REC trigger signal to an external recording

Connecting External Monitors and Recording Devices 111

 • When “Format” in “System” is set to 1920×1080/
59.94P, 50P.
Operating Clips With a
i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector (IEEE1394, 4-
pin)
Computer
Input/output of an HDV or DVCAM stream can
be enabled by changing “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O To use the ExpressCard slot of a
Select” (page 93) of the VIDEO SET menu. computer
To set the input, select “i.LINK” in “Input Source
Select” (page 93) of the VIDEO SET menu. If the computer is equipped with an ExpressCard/
A monitor or VTR that supports i.LINK can be 34 or ExpressCard/54 slot, you can directly insert
connected. the SxS memory card containing clips recorded
with this camcorder and access to the files.
For details on i.LINK connection, see “Connecting
via i.LINK (FAT only)” (page 114). Notes

Note • The SxS Device Driver Software and the UDF Driver
Software must be downloaded and installed on your
When “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” is set to “Wi-Fi&Proxy,” computer. For details, see “Software Downloads”
signals are not input/output from the i.LINK connector. (page 157).
• Operation is not guaranteed with all computers.
• Before editing, set the SxS memory card to the read
A/V OUT connector (audio/video only status and make a backup of the data to the
composite multiconnector) computer.
By changing the setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK For support information for the driver, visit the
I/O Select” (page 93) of the VIDEO SET menu, following URL:
you can output 2-channel audio and down- http://www.sony.net/SxS-Support/
converted SD analog composite signals for With a Windows computer, check that a
monitoring. Removable Disk appears in My Computer. This
Use the supplied AV connection cable for indicates normal status.
connection. With a Macintosh computer, an icon is displayed
on the menu bar.
Note
Connecting External Devices

Signals are not output from the A/V OUT connector To connect with a USB cable
during the following settings
• When “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” is set to “Wi-Fi&Proxy” When you connect the camcorder to the computer
or “USB A.” using the supplied USB cable, the memory card in
• When “Format” in “System” is set to 1920×1080/
the slot is acknowledged as an extended drive by
59.94P, 50P.
the computer.
When two memory cards are mounted in this
camcorder, they are acknowledged as two
independent extended drives by the computer.
Note
The camcorder does not work on the bus power from the
computer.

112 Operating Clips With a Computer

To check the connection to the camcorder If the SxS memory card icon is located on Finder,
click on the eject icon on its side.
1 Connect the PC connector of the
Note
camcorder to the computer with the
supplied USB cable, then set the power Do not select “Card Power Off” from the SxS memory
card icon displayed on the menu bar.
switch to ON to turn on the camcorder.
A message prompting you to confirm that Using the application software
you wish to connect to the computer is
displayed on the LCD monitor/EVF screen. To copy clips to the local disk of your computer,
the dedicated application software must be
Note
downloaded and installed on your computer. For
This message will not be displayed while another details, see “Software Downloads” (page 157).
confirmation message or in-progress message (e.g.,
for formatting or restoration of an SxS memory Although the data regarding recorded materials
card) is shown on the screen. It appears when are stored over multiple files and folders, you can
formatting or restoration is completed. The message easily handle the clips without considering such
is also not displayed while the CLIP INFO screen is data and directory structure by using the
shown on the screen. It appears when an operation
on the CLIP INFO screen is completed or you dedicated application software.
return to the thumbnail screen.
Note
2 Select “Execute” by using the up/down/ If you operate, e.g. copy the clips on the SxS memory
card by using the Explorer (Windows) or Finder
left/right buttons or the jog dial.
(Macintosh), the subsidiary data contained by the clips
may not be maintained.
3 With Windows, check that the memory
card is displayed as a removable disk in Using a nonlinear editing system
My Computer.
With Macintosh, check that a “NO For a nonlinear editing system, optional editing
NAME” or “Untitled” folder was software that corresponds to the recording
formats used with this camcorder is required.
created on the desktop. (The Macintosh
Store the clips to be edited on the HDD of your
folder name can be changed.)
computer in advance, using the dedicated
Notes application software.

Connecting External Devices

• The following operations must be eliminated when the
access lamp is lit in red.
—Turning the power off or disconnecting the power
cord
—Removing the SxS memory card
—Disconnecting the USB cable
• Operation is not guaranteed with all computers.
• Use the supplied USB cable for connection.

Removing an SxS memory card

Windows

1. Click on the icon of “Safely Remove

Hardware” on the task bar of the computer.
2. Select “Safely remove SxS Memory Card -
Drive(X:)” from the displayed menu.
3. Check that the Safe To Remove Hardware
message appears then remove the card.
Macintosh
Drag the SxS memory card icon on the desktop to
Trash.

Operating Clips With a Computer 113

 Recording the Camcorder Picture
Connecting via i.LINK on an External Device
(FAT only) While recording (or standing by to record), the
picture being shot with this camcorder is output as
When an HDV-compatible video format (SP an HDV or DVCAM stream via the i.LINK
1440×1080/59.94i, SP 1440×1080/50i, or SP (HDV/DV) connector. It can be recorded on a
1440×1080/23.98P) or a DVCAM-compatible connected HDV or DVCAM recorder in
video format (format of SD Mode) is selected, synchronization with the REC START/STOP
setting “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” (page 93) operation on this camcorder.
of the VIDEO SET menu to “HDV” or
“DVCAM” enables signal inputs/outputs via the 1 Perform the preparatory settings of the
i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector. camcorder.
You can record the same images as those • “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” (page 93)
recorded on an SxS memory card in this of the VIDEO SET menu
camcorder on an external device connected to the • “Trigger Mode” (page 104) of the
i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector, or record playback OTHERS menu
pictures of the external device on the memory
card in the camcorder. 2 Set the external device to recording
DVCAM stream audio is only available in 48 kHz standby status.
16-bit 2-channel lock audio format.
Notes
3 Start recording with the camcorder.
The external device starts recording in
• Use the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector only for one-to-
one i.LINK connection. synchronization.
• When you change a setting which affects output
signals from the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector, such as The status of the external device is displayed in
“System” of the OTHERS menu or “SDI/HDMI/ the i.LINK status indication area (page 13) on the
i.LINK I/O Select” and “Down Converter” of the
VIDEO SET menu, disconnect the i.LINK cable then LCD monitor/EVF screen.
change the setting. Changing such a setting with the Indication Status of the external device
i.LINK cable connected may cause improper operation
Connecting External Devices

of the connected i.LINK device. STBY HDV In HDV recording standby

• When “Wi-Fi&Proxy/USB” is set to “Wi-Fi&Proxy,” In HDV recording
zREC HDV
signals are not input/output from the i.LINK
connector. STBY DV In DV recording standby
zREC DV In DV recording
i.LINK and are trademarks.
Notes
• Operation may be different depending on the type of
external device.
• There is some time lag from when you start recording
until the i.LINK status indication changes. Recording
does not start on the connected i.LINK device before it
enters synchronization even if “Trigger Mode” is set to
“Both.”
• While you can record shot marks on the memory card
during recording, they are not added to the pictures
recorded on the external device.

114 Connecting via i.LINK (FAT only)

 DVCAM50i, 25P SQ/EC: DVCAM stream
Nonlinear Editing signal of 720×576/50i
Other video formats and combination of input
When the camcorder is displaying thumbnails or signals cannot be recorded.
in playback mode, you can transfer an HDV
stream to a nonlinear editing system connected 2 Set “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select”
via the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector. (page 93) of the VIDEO SET menu to
Notes
“HDV.”
• The i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector of this camcorder is
a 4-pin connector. Check the number of pins of the
3 Set “Input Source Select” (page 93) of
i.LINK connector on your computer and use an the VIDEO SET menu to “i.LINK.”
appropriate i.LINK cable. The input image is displayed on the LCD
• In searching pictures of this camcorder on the monitor/EVF screen and the monitor connected
computer, it may take some time until the display is
via the VIDEO OUT connector.
reflected on the computer.
• If the playback clip is short or the playback starting The audio signal is output from the built-in
point is near the end of the clip, the i.LINK signal may speaker, headphones connected to the
be interrupted between the clip and the next clip. When headphone connector, and the speaker of the
you try to capture such a signal using the nonlinear monitor connected to the AUDIO OUT
editing system, a malfunction may occur, depending connector.
on the nonlinear editing software in use.
• If you specify a search speed other than 4, 15, or 24
times normal with the nonlinear editing system, no 4 Press the REC START/STOP button
i.LINK signal is fed out. In such a case, the picture on (page 9) or the REC START button
the LCD monitor may stay frozen. (page 12).
• High-speed playback picture may not be displayed on
the computer screen, depending on the nonlinear Recording begins.
editing software in use.
Notes
Setting on this camcorder
• An error is generated in the following cases. In such a
Set “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” (page 93) of case, cancel Recording mode by pressing the REC
the VIDEO SET menu to “HDV” or “DVCAM.” START/STOP button.
—The video format of input signal does not match
that specified on the camcorder.
Recording External Input Signals —A copy-protected stream is being fed in.

Connecting External Devices

• If the input to the camcorder becomes no signal during
recording, the tally lamps and the i.LINK zREC status
The input from a device connected via the i.LINK indication on the LCD monitor/EVF screen flash,
(HDV/DV) connector can be recorded on an SxS indicating that no signal is being recorded on the SxS
memory card in this camcorder. The timecodes memory card.
When an input signal is resumed, recording is
superimposed on the i.LINK input are recorded restarted, incrementing the clip number on the memory
regardless of the settings of the camcorder. card.

1 Set the external signal to a format that

can be recorded on the camcorder.
Depending on the video format (page 105)
setting of this unit, recordable input signals are
as follows:
• FAT HD Mode
SP 1440×1080/59.94i or SP 1440×1080/
23.98P: HDV stream signal of 1440×1080/
59.94i
SP 1440×1080/50i: HDV stream signal of
1440×1080/50i
• FAT SD Mode
DVCAM59.94i, 29.97P SQ/EC: DVCAM
stream signal of 720×480/59.94i

Connecting via i.LINK (FAT only) 115

 Video format Valid reference
External Synchronization XAVC-I 720/59.94P
signal
1080/59.94i
XAVC-L50 720/59.94P 720/59.94P
When multiple units of the camcorder are used in HD422 50/720/59.94P NTSC
the same shooting location, recording can be HQ 1280×720/59.94P
made in synchronization with a specific reference HD422 50/720/29.97P
HD422 50/720/23.98P
signal, and the timecode can be matched among
HQ 1280×720/23.98P
all the units.
IMX50 59.94i SQ/EC 1080/59.94i
IMX50 29.97P SQ/EC NTSC
Aligning the phase of the video signal DVCAM 59.94i SQ/EC
(Genlock) DVCAM 29.97P SQ/EC

Genlock operation is enabled by supplying a 1) 23.98P Output: 59.94i (2-3 Pull Down))
reference signal to the GENLOCK IN connector 2) 23.98P Output: 23.98PsF
(page 11) of the camcorder. MP4
Valid reference signals depend on the video
Video format Valid reference
format selected.
signal
For “NTSC/NTSC(J) Area” HQ 1920×1080/59.94i 1080/59.94i
MXF HQ 1440×1080/59.94i NTSC
SP 1440×1080/59.94i
Video format Valid reference
HQ 1920×1080/29.97P
signal
HQ 1440×1080/29.97P
XAVC-L50 1080/59.94P 1080/59.94i HQ 1920×1080/23.98P 1)
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94P NTSC HQ 1440×1080/23.98P 1)
XAVC-I 1080/59.94i SP 1440×1080/23.98P
XAVC-L50 1080/59.94i
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P 2) 1080/23.98PsF
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94i
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P 2) NTSC
XAVC-L25 1080/59.94i
HQ 1280×720/59.94P 1080/59.94i
XAVC-I 1080/29.97P
HQ 1280×720/29.97P 720/59.94P
XAVC-L50 1080/29.97P
HQ 1280×720/23.98P NTSC
XAVC-L35 1080/29.97P
Connecting External Devices

XAVC-I 1080/23.98P 1) 1) 23.98P Output: 59.94i (2-3 Pull Down))

XAVC-L50 1080/23.98P 1) 2) 23.98P Output: 23.98PsF
XAVC-L35 1080/23.98P 1)
HD422 50/1080/59.94i AVI
HQ 1920×1080/59.94i Video format Valid reference
HQ 1440×1080/59.94i signal
HD422 50/1080/29.97P
DVCAM 59.94i SQ/EC 1080/59.94i
HQ 1920×1080/29.97P
DVCAM 29.97P SQ/EC NTSC
HQ 1440×1080/29.97P
HD422 50/1080/23.98P 1)
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P 1)
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P 1)
XAVC-I 1080/23.98P 2) 1080/23.98PsF
XAVC-L50 1080/23.98P 2) NTSC
XAVC-L35 1080/23.98P 2)
HD422 50/1080/23.98P 2)
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P 2)
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P 2)

116 External Synchronization

For “PAL Area” Notes
MXF
• When the output format is SD Mode and you use one
Video format Valid reference of the video formats below, genlock is not possible. Set
the video format to HD Mode.
signal
MXF: XAVC-I 720/59.94P
XAVC-L50 1080/50P 1080/50i XAVC-L50 720/59.94P
XAVC-L35 1080/50P PAL HD422 50/720/59.94P
XAVC-I 1080/50i HQ 1280×720/59.94P
XAVC-L50 1080/50i XAVC-I 720/50P
XAVC-L35 1080/50i XAVC-L50 720/50P
XAVC-L25 1080/50i HD422 50/720/50P
HQ 1280×720/50P
XAVC-I 1080/25P
MP4: HQ 1280×720/59.94P
XAVC-L50 1080/25P HQ 1280×720/50P
XAVC-L35 1080/25P • If the reference signal is unstable, genlock is not
HD422 50/1080/50i possible.
HQ 1920×1080/50i • The subcarrier is not synchronized.
HQ 1440×1080/50i
HD422 50/1080/25P Synchronizing the timecode of your
HQ 1920×1080/25P
HQ 1440×1080/25P
camcorder with that of another unit
XAVC-I 720/50P 1080/50i Set the unit that supplies the timecode to a mode
XAVC-L50 720/50P 720/50P in which the timecode output keeps advancing
HD422 50/720/50P PAL (Free Run or Clock mode).
HQ 1280×720/50P
HD422 50/720/25P 1 Set “Timecode” of the TC/UB SET
IMX50 50i SQ/EC 1080/50i menu as follows:
IMX50 25P SQ/EC PAL
DVCAM 50i SQ/EC Mode: Preset
DVCAM 25P SQ/EC Run: Free Run

MP4 2 Press the DURATION/TC/U-BIT

Video format Valid reference button (page 9) so that the timecode is
signal displayed on the screen.

Connecting External Devices

HQ 1920×1080/50i 1080/50i
HQ 1440×1080/50i PAL 3 Confirm that the IN/OUT switch (page
SP 1440×1080/50i 11) is set to IN, then supply an HD or SD
HQ 1920×1080/25P reference video signal to the
HQ 1440×1080/25P GENLOCK IN connector and the
HQ 1280×720/50P 1080/50i reference timecode to the TC IN
HQ 1280×720/25P 720/50P connector.
PAL
The built-in timecode generator of your
AVI camcorder locks to the reference timecode, and
Video format Valid reference the message “EXT-LK” is displayed on the
signal screen.
DVCAM 50i SQ/EC 1080/50i About 10 seconds after locking, even if the
DVCAM 25P SQ/EC PAL reference timecode from the external device is
disconnected, the external lock will be kept.
The phase adjustment for the reference signal can
also be made with “Genlock” (page 104) of the Notes
OTHERS menu. • Check that the reference timecode and the reference
video signal are in a phase relation that complies the
SMPTE timecode standards.
• When you finish the above procedure, the timecode is
immediately synchronized with the external timecode,
and the time data indication will show the value of the
external timecode. However, wait for a few seconds

External Synchronization 117

 until the timecode generator stabilizes before
recording.
• If the frequency of the reference video signal and the
frame frequency are not the same, a lock cannot be
acquired, and the camcorder will not operate properly.
In such a case, the timecode will not be correctly
locked to the external timecode.
• When the connection is removed, the timecode
advance may shift one frame per hour with respect to
the reference timecode.
To release the external timecode
synchronization
Change the “Timecode” setting of the TC/UB
SET menu or set the camcorder to off.
External synchronization is also released when
you start recording in a special recording mode
(Slow & Quick Motion, Frame Rec, or Interval
Rec).

Synchronizing the timecode of another

unit with that of your camcorder

1 Specify the timecode of your camcorder

with “Timecode” and “TC Format” of
the TC/UB SET menu (page 34).

2 Confirm that the IN/OUT switch (page

11) is set to OUT, then connect the TC
OUT connector and VIDEO OUT
connector (page 11) with the timecode
input and reference signal input of the
other unit, respectively.
Connecting External Devices

The timecode to be output from the TC OUT

connector depends on the setting of “TC Out” in
“Timecode” of the TC/UB SET menu. If “TC
Out” is set to “Generator,” the timecode
generated by the timecode generator of the
camcorder is output during recording and
playback. If “TC Out” is set to “Auto,” the
timecode generated by the timecode generator is
output during recording, and that superimposed
with the video signal is output during playback.

118 External Synchronization

 Appendices
Important Notes on Operation
In the event of operating problems
Use and Storage If you should experience problems with the unit,
Do not subject the unit to severe shock contact your Sony dealer.
• The internal mechanism may be damaged or the
body warped. The fan and battery are consumable parts
• If an accessory mounted on the accessory shoe that will need periodic replacement
is subjected to severe shock, the accessory shoe
The fan and battery are consumable parts that will
may be damaged. In such a case, stop using it
need periodic replacement.
and contact your dealer or a Sony service
When operating at room temperature, a normal
representative.
replacement cycle will be about 5 years.
Do not cover the unit while operating However, this replacement cycle represents only
Putting a cloth, for example, over the unit can a general guideline and does not imply that the
cause excessive internal heat build-up. life expectancy of these parts is guaranteed. For
After use details on parts replacement, contact your dealer.
Always set the power switch to OFF.
Use and storage locations
Before storing the unit for a long period
Remove the battery pack. Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or
storing the unit in the following places:
Grip the handle when carrying
• In excessive heat or cold (operating temperature
Grip the handle to carry. If you carry it by other
range: 0ºC to 40ºC or 32ºF to 104ºF)
parts, such as the front microphone block or the
Remember that in summer in warm climates the
LCD monitor block, the camcorder may drop,
temperature inside a car with the windows
causing injury.
closed can easily exceed 50ºC (122ºF).
Do not leave the camcorder with the lenses • In damp or dusty locations
facing the sun • Locations where the unit may be exposed to rain
Direct sunlight can enter through the lenses, be • Locations subject to violent vibration
focused in the camcorder, and cause fire. • Near strong magnetic fields
• Close to radio or TV transmitters producing
Shipping strong electromagnetic fields.
• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for Appendices
• Remove the memory cards before transporting
extended periods
the unit.
• If sending the unit by truck, ship, air or other To prevent electromagnetic interference from
transportation service, pack it in the shipping portable communications devices
carton of the unit. The use of portable telephones and other
communications devices near this unit can result
Care of the unit in malfunctions and interference with audio and
video signals.
Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the lens It is recommended that the portable
using a blower. communications devices near this unit be
If the body of the unit is dirty, clean it with a soft, powered off.
dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a cloth steeped in
a little neutral detergent, then wipe dry. Do not Note on laser beams
use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinner, as Laser beams may damage the CMOS image
these may cause discoloration or other damage to sensors. If you shoot a scene that includes a laser
the finish of the unit. beam, be careful not to let the laser beam be
directed into the lens of the camcorder.

Important Notes on Operation 119

 Flicker
About the LCD panels If recording is made under lighting produced by
The LCD panel fitted to this unit is manufactured discharge tubes, such as fluorescent, sodium, or
with high precision technology, giving a mercury-vapor lamps, the screen may flicker,
functioning pixel ratio of at least 99.99%. Thus a colors may vary, or horizontal stripes may appear
very small proportion of pixels may be “stuck”, distorted.
either always off (black), always on (red, green,
or blue), or flashing. In addition, over a long
period of use, because of the physical
characteristics of the liquid crystal display, such
“stuck” pixels may appear spontaneously. These
problems are not a malfunction. Note that any
such problems have no effect on recorded data.

On condensation In such cases, set the Flicker-Reduction function

If the unit is suddenly taken from a cold to a warm to Auto mode (page 33).
location, or if ambient temperature suddenly In some cases, such phenomena may not be
rises, moisture may form on the outer surface of improved with the Flicker-Reduction function.
the unit and/or inside of the unit. This is known as It is recommend to set the electronic shutter speed
condensation. If condensation occurs, turn off the to 1/100 sec. in 50-Hz areas and to 1/60 in 60-Hz
unit and wait until the condensation clears before areas.
operating the unit. Operating the unit while Focal plane
condensation is present may damage the unit. Owing to the characteristics of the pickup
elements (CMOS sensors) for reading video
Phenomena specific to CMOS image signals, subjects that quickly move across the
sensors screen may appear slightly skewed.

The following phenomena that may appear in Flash band

images are specific to CMOS (Complementary The luminance at the top and bottom of the screen
Metal Oxide Semiconductor) image sensors. may change when shooting a flashlight beam or a
They do not indicate malfunctions. light source that quickly flashes.

White flecks
Note on the EVF display
Although the CMOS image sensors are produced
with high-precision technologies, fine white • Pictures on the LCD monitor and EVF screen
flecks may be generated on the screen in rare may be distorted by the following operations:
cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc. —Changing the video format
Appendices

This is related to the principle of CMOS image —Rec Review

sensors and is not a malfunction. —Starting playback from the Thumbnail
screen
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the —Reversing the LCD monitor
following cases: —Switching the Expanded Focus display
• when operating at a high environmental • When you change the eye direction in the EVF,
temperature you may see primary colors red, green, and
• when you have raised the master gain blue, but this is not a defect of the camcorder.
(sensitivity) These primary colors are not recorded on any
• when operating in Slow-Shutter mode recording media.
Aliasing
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they
may appear jagged or flicker.

120 Important Notes on Operation

Fragmentation
If pictures cannot be recorded/reproduced
properly, try formatting the recording medium.
While repeating picture recording/playback with
a certain recording medium for an extended
period, files in the medium may be fragmented,
disabling proper recording/storage. In such a
case, make a backup of clips in the medium then
perform formatting of the medium using “Format
Media” (page 107) of the OTHERS menu.

Notes on security
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING
FROM A FAILURE TO IMPLEMENT PROPER
SECURITY MEASURES ON TRANSMISSION
DEVICES, UNAVOIDABLE DATA LEAKS
RESULTING FROM TRANSMISSION
SPECIFICATIONS, OR SECURITY
PROBLEMS OF ANY KIND.

Appendices

Important Notes on Operation 121

 Video Format (Format)
The video formats that can be selected at “Format” in “System” (page 105) of the OTHERS menu are listed below.
The default settings set at the factory are shown in bold face (example: HD422 50/1080/59.94i)

UDF HD Mode

Country setting NTSC Area/NTSC(J) Area PAL Area

Selectable video format HD422 50/1080/59.94i HD422 50/1080/50i
HQ 1920×1080/59.94i HQ 1920×1080/50i
HQ 1440×1080/59.94i HQ 1440×1080/50i
HD422 50/1080/29.97P HD422 50/1080/25P
HQ 1920×1080/29.97P HQ 1920×1080/25P
HQ 1440×1080/29.97P HQ 1440×1080/25P
HD422 50/1080/23.98P HD422 50/720/50P
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P HQ 1280×720/50P
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P HD422 50/720/25P
HD422 50/720/59.94P
HQ 1280×720/59.94P
HD422 50/720/29.97P
HD422 50/720/23.98P
HQ 1280×720/23.98P

UDF SD Mode

Country setting NTSC Area/NTSC(J) Area PAL Area

Selectable video format IMX50 59.94i SQ IMX50 50i SQ
IMX50 59.94i EC IMX50 50i EC
DVCAM 59.94i SQ DVCAM 50i SQ
DVCAM 59.94i EC DVCAM 50i EC
IMX50 29.97P SQ IMX50 25P SQ
IMX50 29.97P EC IMX50 25P EC
DVCAM 29.97P SQ DVCAM 25P SQ
Appendices

DVCAM 29.97P EC DVCAM 25P EC

122 Video Format (Format)

exFAT HD Mode

Country setting NTSC Area/NTSC(J) Area

MXF file format XAVC MPEG2
Selectable video format XAVC-L50 1080/59.94P HD422 50/1080/59.94i
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94P HQ 1920×1080/59.94i
XAVC-I 1080/59.94i HQ 1440×1080/59.94i
XAVC-L50 1080/59.94i HD422 50/1080/29.97P
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94i HQ 1920×1080/29.97P
XAVC-L25 1080/59.94i HQ 1440×1080/29.97P
XAVC-I 1080/29.97P HD422 50/1080/23.98P
XAVC-L50 1080/29.97P HQ 1920×1080/23.98P
XAVC-L35 1080/29.97P HQ 1440×1080/23.98P
XAVC-I 1080/23.98P HD422 50/720/59.94P
XAVC-L50 1080/23.98P HQ 1280×720/59.94P
XAVC-L35 1080/23.98P HD422 50/720/29.97P
XAVC-I 720/59.94P HD422 50/720/23.98P
XAVC-L50 720/59.94P HQ 1280×720/23.98P

Country setting PAL Area

MXF file format XAVC MPEG2
Selectable video format XAVC-L50 1080/50P HD422 50/1080/50i
XAVC-L35 1080/50P HQ 1920×1080/50i
XAVC-I 1080/50i HQ 1440×1080/50i
XAVC-L50 1080/50i HD422 50/1080/25P
XAVC-L35 1080/50i HQ 1920×1080/25P
XAVC-L25 1080/50i HQ 1440×1080/25P
XAVC-I 1080/25P HD422 50/720/50P
XAVC-L50 1080/25P HQ 1280×720/50P
XAVC-L35 1080/25P HD422 50/720/25P
XAVC-I 720/50P
XAVC-L50 720/50P

exFAT SD Mode
Appendices

Country setting NTSC Area/NTSC(J) Area PAL Area

Selectable video format DVCAM 59.94i SQ DVCAM 50i SQ
DVCAM 59.94i EC DVCAM 50i EC
DVCAM 29.97P SQ DVCAM 25P SQ
DVCAM 29.97P EC DVCAM 25P EC

Video Format (Format) 123

 FAT HD Mode

Country setting NTSC Area/NTSC(J) Area PAL Area

Selectable video format HQ 1920×1080/59.94i HQ 1920×1080/50i
HQ 1440×1080/59.94i HQ 1440×1080/50i
SP 1440×1080/59.94i SP 1440×1080/50i
HQ 1920×1080/29.97P HQ 1920×1080/25P
HQ 1440×1080/29.97P HQ 1440×1080/25P
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P HQ 1280×720/50P
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P HQ 1280×720/25P
SP 1440×1080/23.98P
HQ 1280×720/59.94P
HQ 1280×720/29.97P
HQ 1280×720/23.98P

FAT SD Mode

Country setting NTSC Area/NTSC(J) Area PAL Area

Selectable video format DVCAM 59.94i SQ DVCAM 50i SQ
DVCAM 59.94i EC DVCAM 50i EC
DVCAM 29.97P SQ DVCAM 25P SQ
DVCAM 29.97P EC DVCAM 25P EC
Appendices

124 Video Format (Format)

 Formats and Limitations of Outputs

Video Formats and Output Signals

Output formats for the SDI OUT connector

Serial digital signals from the SDI OUT connector are output depending on the settings of the setup menu
and format of the clip being played.
The output format is converted when using the settings in the following chart.
Notes
• When the format is UDF HD Mode, exFAT HD Mode, or FAT HD Mode and “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the
VIDEO SET menu is set to “SD SDI & SD HDMI i,” a down-converted SD signal is output.
• When “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” in the VIDEO SET menu is set to other than “3G SDI & HD HDMI,” “HD SDI
& HD HDMI,” or “SD SDI & SD HDMI i,” signals are not output from the SDI OUT connector.

While recording or standing by to record

Input format Output format
Setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu
“Format” in “System” of
3G SDI & HD HDMI SD SDI & SD HDMI i
the OTHERS menu
HD SDI & HD HDMI
59.94P (XAVC-L) 1920×1080/59.94P 1) SD/59.94i 4)
1920×1080/59.94i 4)
59.94i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1920×1080/59.94i SD/59.94i
HQ/SP)
29.97P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1920×1080/29.97PsF SD/29.97PsF
HQ) 1280×720/59.94P 5)
23.98P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1920×1080/59.94i 2) SD/59.94i
HQ) 1920×1080/23.98PsF 3)
1280×720/59.94P 5)
23.98P(SP) 1920×1080/59.94i
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1280×720/59.94P SD/59.94i 4)
HQ)
59.94i (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/59.94i
Appendices
29.97P (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/29.97PsF
50P (XAVC-L) 1920×1080/50P 1) SD/50i 4)
1920×1080/50i 4)
50i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ/ 1920×1080/50i SD/50i
SP)
25P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1920×1080/25PsF SD/25PsF
1280×720/50P 5)
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1280×720/50P SD/50i 4)
50i (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/50i
25P (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/25PsF

1) For 3G SDI & HD HDMI.

2) When “23.98P OUTPUT” of the VIDEO SET menu is set to “59.94i(2-3 Pull Down).”
3) When “23.98P OUTPUT” of the VIDEO SET menu is set to “23.98PsF.”
4) Converted to interlace from progressive.
5) When the format is 720.

Formats and Limitations of Outputs 125

 During clip playback
Output format
Setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu
Format of the played clip
3G SDI & HD HDMI SD SDI & SD HDMI i
HD SDI & HD HDMI
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L) 1920×1080/59.94P 1) SD/59.94i 4)
1920×1080/59.94i 4)
59.94i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1920×1080/59.94i SD/59.94i
HQ/SP)
29.97P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1920×1080/29.97PsF SD/29.97PsF
HQ) 1280×720/59.94P 1)
23.98P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1920×1080/59.94i 2) SD/59.94i
HQ) 1920×1080/23.98PsF 3)
1280×720/59.94P 6)
23.98P (SP) 1920×1080/59.94i
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1280×720/59.94P SD/59.94i 4)
HQ)
59.94i (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/59.94i
29.97P (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/29.97PsF
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L) 1920×1080/50P 1) SD/50i 4)
1920×1080/50i 4)
50i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ/ 1920×1080/50i SD/50i
SP)
25P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1920×1080/25PsF SD/25PsF
1280×720/50P 5)
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1280×720/50P SD/50i 4)
50i (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/50i
25P (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/25PsF

1) For 3G SDI & HD HDMI.

2) When “23.98P OUTPUT” of the VIDEO SET menu is set to “59.94i(2-3 Pull Down)” and the format of the played
clip is 1080.
3) When “23.98P OUTPUT” of the VIDEO SET menu is set to “23.98PsF” and the format of the played clip is 1080.
4) Converted to interlace from progressive.
5) When the format is 720.
6) When the format of the played clip is 720. When playing a PureP clip that is recorded in FAT/HQ 1280×720/23.98P,
Appendices

it is played by pull-down automatically.

126 Formats and Limitations of Outputs

When a thumbnail screen is displayed
Input format Output format
Setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu
“Format” in “System” of
3G SDI & HD HDMI SD SDI & SD HDMI i
the OTHERS menu
HD SDI & HD HDMI
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L) 1920×1080/59.94i 3) SD/59.94i 3)
59.94i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1920×1080/59.94i SD/59.94i
HQ/SP) 1280×720/59.94P 4)
29.97P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ)
23.98P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1920×1080/59.94i 1)
HQ) 1920×1080/23.98PsF 2)
1280×720/59.94P 4)
23.98P (SP) 1920×1080/59.94i
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1280×720/59.94P SD/59.94i 3)
HQ)
59.94i (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/59.94i
29.97P (DVCAM/IMX) –
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L) 1920×1080/50i 3) SD/50i 3)
50i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ/ 1920×1080/50i SD/50i
SP) 1280×720/50P 4)
25P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ)
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1280×720/50P SD/50i 3)
50i (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/50i
25P (DVCAM/IMX) –

1) When “23.98P OUTPUT” of the VIDEO SET menu is set to “59.94i(2-3 Pull Down).”
2) When “23.98P OUTPUT” of the VIDEO SET menu is set to “23.98PsF.”
3) Converted to interlace from progressive.
4) When the format is 720.

Appendices

Formats and Limitations of Outputs 127

 Output formats from the HDMI OUT connector
Serial digital signals from the HDMI OUT connector are output depending on the settings of the setup
menu and format of the clip being played.
The output format is converted when using the settings in the following chart.
Note
When the format is UDF HD Mode, exFAT HD Mode, or FAT HD Mode and “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the
VIDEO SET menu is set to “SD SDI & SD HDMI i,” a down-converted SD signal is output.

While recording or standing by to record

Input format Output format
Setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu
“Format” in “System” of 3G SDI & HD HDMI SD SDI & SD HDMI i SD HDMI P & HDV
the OTHERS menu HD SDI & HD HDMI SD HDMI i & HDV SD HDMI P
HD HDMI & HDV SD HDMI i & DVCAM
59.94P (XAVC-L) 1920×1080/59.94i 1) SD/59.94i 1) SD/59.94P
59.94i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1920×1080/59.94i SD/59.94i SD/59.94P 2)
HQ/SP)
29.97P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1920×1080/29.97PsF SD/29.97PsF SD/59.94P
HQ) 1280×720/59.94P 3)
23.98P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1920×1080/59.94i SD/59.94i
HQ/SP) 1280×720/59.94P 3)
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1280×720/59.94P SD/59.94i 1)
HQ)
59.94i (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/59.94i –
29.97P (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/29.97PsF –
50P (XAVC-L) 1920×1080/50i 1) SD/50i 1) SD/50P
50i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ/ 1920×1080/50i SD/50i SD/50P 2)
SP)
25P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1920×1080/25PsF SD/25PsF SD/50P
1280×720/50P 3)
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1280×720/50P SD/50i 1)
50i (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/50i –
25P (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/25PsF –

1) Converted to interlace from progressive.

Appendices

2) Converted to progressive from interlace.

3) When the format is 720.

128 Formats and Limitations of Outputs

During clip playback
Output format
Setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu
Format of the played clip 3G SDI & HD HDMI SD SDI & SD HDMI i SD HDMI P & HDV
HD SDI & HD HDMI SD HDMI i & HDV SD HDMI P
HD HDMI & HDV SD HDMI i & DVCAM
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L) 1920×1080/59.94i 1) SD/59.94i 1) SD/59.94P
59.94i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1920×1080/59.94i SD/59.94i SD/59.94P 2)
HQ/SP)
29.97P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1920×1080/29.97PsF SD/29.97PsF SD/59.94P
HQ) 1280×720/59.94P 3)
23.98P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1920×1080/59.94i SD/59.94i
HQ/SP) 1280×720/59.94P 4)
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1280×720/59.94P SD/59.94i 3)
HQ)
59.94i (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/59.94i –
29.97P (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/29.97PsF –
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L) 1920×1080/50i 1) SD/50i 1) SD/50P
50i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ/ 1920×1080/50i SD/50i SD/50P 2)
SP)
25P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1920×1080/25PsF SD/25PsF SD/50P
1280×720/50P 3)
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1280×720/50P SD/50i 1)
50i (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/50i –
25P (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/25PsF –

1) Converted to interlace from progressive.

2) Converted to progressive from interlace.
3) When the format is 720.
4) When the format of the played clip is 720. When playing a PureP clip that is recorded in FAT/HQ 1280×720/23.98P,
it is played by pull-down automatically.

When a thumbnail screen is displayed

Input format Output format
Setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu
“Format” in “System” of 3G SDI & HD HDMI SD SDI & SD HDMI i SD HDMI P & HDV Appendices
the OTHERS menu HD SDI & HD HDMI SD HDMI i & HDV SD HDMI P
HD HDMI & HDV SD HDMI i & DVCAM
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L) 1920×1080/59.94i 1) SD/59.94i 1) SD/59.94P
59.94i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1920×1080/59.94i SD/59.94i SD/59.94P 2)
HQ/SP)
29.97P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1920×1080/59.94i SD/59.94P
HQ) 1280×720/59.94P 3)
23.98P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1920×1080/59.94i
HQ) 1280×720/59.94P 3)
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/ 1280×720/59.94P SD/59.94i 1)
HQ)
59.94i (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/59.94i –
29.97P (DVCAM/IMX) – –
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L) 1920×1080/50i 1) SD/50i 1) SD/50P

Formats and Limitations of Outputs 129

 Input format Output format
Setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu
“Format” in “System” of 3G SDI & HD HDMI SD SDI & SD HDMI i SD HDMI P & HDV
the OTHERS menu HD SDI & HD HDMI SD HDMI i & HDV SD HDMI P
HD HDMI & HDV SD HDMI i & DVCAM
50i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ/ 1920×1080/50i SD/50i SD/50P 2)
SP)
25P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1920×1080/50i SD/50P
1280×720/50P 3)
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1280×720/50P SD/50i 2)
50i (DVCAM/IMX) – SD/50i –
25P (DVCAM/IMX) – –

1) Converted to interlace from progressive.

2) Converted to progressive from interlace.
3) When the format is 720.

Output formats from the VIDEO OUT connector

Signals output from the VIDEO OUT connector are either the HD-Y signals output from the SDI OUT
connector/HDMI OUT connector (when outputting HD from the SDI OUT connector or HDMI OUT
connector), or analog composite signals (when outputting SD from the SDI OUT connector or HDMI
OUT connector).
Signals of clips recorded in a different system from the setting of “Country” in “System” of the OTHERS
menu are converted to the following frame rates for simplified playback before output.
When you play clips recorded with the PAL system while the “Country” is set to “NTSC Area/NTSC(J)
Area.”
Some frames may be repeated due to frame rate conversion.
VIDEO OUT Output format
Playback clip video format
HD-Y Analog composite
XAVC-L50 1080/50P 1920×1080/60i SD/59.94i
XAVC-L35 1080/50P
XAVC-I 1080/50i
XAVC-L50 1080/50i
XAVC-L35 1080/50i
XAVC-L25 1080/50i
HD422 50/1080/50i
Appendices

HQ 1920×1080/50i
HQ 1440×1080/50i
SP 1440×1080/50i
XAVC-I 1080/25P 1920×1080/30PsF SD/29.97PsF
XAVC-L50 1080/25P
XAVC-L35 1080/25P
HD422 50/1080/25P
HQ 1920×1080/25P
HQ 1440×1080/25P
XAVC-I 720/50P 1280×720/60P SD/59.94i
XAVC-L50 720/50P
HD422 50/720/50P
HQ 1280×720/50P
HD422 50/720/25P SD/29.97PsF
HQ 1280×720/25P

130 Formats and Limitations of Outputs

 VIDEO OUT Output format
Playback clip video format
HD-Y Analog composite
DVCAM50i SQ/EC Cannot be played Cannot be played
DVCAM25P SQ/EC
IMX50/50i SQ/EC
IMX50/25P SQ/EC

When you play clips recorded with the NTSC system while the “Country” is set to “PAL Area.”
Some frames may be deleted due to frame rate conversion.
VIDEO OUT Output format
Playback clip video format
HD-Y Analog composite
XAVC-L50 1080/59.94P 1920×1080/49.95i SD/50i
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94P
XAVC-I 1080/59.94i
XAVC-L50 1080/59.94i
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94i
XAVC-L25 1080/59.94i
HD422 50/1080/59.94i
HQ 1920×1080/59.94i
HQ 1440×1080/59.94i
SP 1440×1080/59.94i
XAVC-I 1080/29.97P 1920×1080/24.97PsF SD/25PsF
XAVC-L50 1080/29.97P
XAVC-L35 1080/29.97P
HD422 50/1080/29.97P
HQ 1920×1080/29.97P
HQ 1440×1080/29.97P
XAVC-I 1080/23.98P
XAVC-L50 1080/23.98P
XAVC-L35 1080/23.98P
HD422 50/1080/23.98P
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P
SP 1440×1080/23.98P
XAVC-I 720/59.94P 1280×720/49.95P SD/50i
XAVC-L50 720/59.94P
HD422 50/720/59.94P
HQ 1280×720/59.94P
Appendices
HD422 50/720/29.97P SD/25PsF
HQ 1280×720/29.97P
HD422 50/720/23.98P
HQ 1280×720/23.98P
DVCAM59.94i SQ/EC Cannot be played Cannot be played
DVCAM29.97P SQ/EC
IMX50/59.94i SQ/EC
IMX50/29.97P SQ/EC

Formats and Limitations of Outputs 131

 Output formats from the i.LINK I/O connector
Serial digital signals from the i.LINK I/O connector are output in the following formats depending on the
settings of the setup menu and format of the clip being played.
Notes
• When “F.Sys.” in the OTHERS menu is set to “UDF” or “exFAT,” signals are not output from the i.LINK I/O
connector.
• When “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu is set to “3G SDI & HD HDMI,” “HD SDI & HD
HDMI,” “SD SDI & SD HDMI i,” or “SD HDMI P,” signals are not output from the i.LINK I/O connector.
While recording (or standing by to record)/When playing a clip
When recording: Output format
“Format” in “System” of Setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu
the OTHERS menu HD HDMI & HDV SD HDMI i & DVCAM
When playing: Playback SD HDMI i & HDV
clip video format SD HDMI P & HDV
HQ 1920×1080/59.94i No signal SD/59.94i
HQ 1440×1080/59.94i
HQ 1920×1080/29.97P SD/29.97PsF
HQ 1440×1080/29.97P
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P No signal
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P
SP 1440×1080/59.94i 1440×1080/59.94i SD/59.94i
SP 1440×1080/23.98P 1440×1080/59.94i 1) SD/59.94i 1)
HQ 1280×720/59.94P No signal SD/59.94i 2)
HQ 1280×720/29.97P SD/29.97PsF
HQ 1280×720/23.98P No signal
DVCAM59.94i SQ/EC SD/59.94i
DVCAM29.97P SQ/EC SD/29.97PsF
HQ 1920×1080/50i No signal SD/50i
HQ 1440×1080/50i
HQ 1920×1080/25P SD/25PsF
HQ 1440×1080/25P
SP 1440×1080/50i 1440×1080/50i SD/50i
HQ 1280×720/50P No signal SD/50i 3)
HQ 1280×720/25P SD/25PsF
Appendices

DVCAM50i SQ/EC SD/50i

DVCAM25P SQ/EC SD/25PsF

1) 59.94i provided through 2-3 pulldown of 23.98P.

2) 59.94i provided through conversion from 59.94P.
3) 50i provided through conversion from 50P.

132 Formats and Limitations of Outputs

Limitations of Inputs/Outputs
The outputs from the camcorder are limited by the menu settings as follows:
×: no signal
Menu setting Output Input
System SDI/HDMI/ SDI HDMI i.LINK VIDEO A/V i.LINK
F.Sys. HD/SD i.LINK I/O OUT OUT OUT OUT
Select
UDF HD HD SDI & HD HD HD × HD-Y × ×
HDMI
SD SDI & SD SD SD × Composite Composite ×
HDMI i
SD HDMI P × SD-P × × × ×
Off × × × Composite Composite ×
exFAT HD 3G SDI & HD 3G 1) HD × HD-Y 2) × ×
HDMI HD
HD SDI & HD HD HD × HD-Y 2) × ×
HDMI
SD SDI & SD SD SD × Composite 2) Composite 2) ×
HDMI i
SD HDMI P × SD-P × × × ×
Off × × × Composite 2) Composite 2) ×
FAT HD/HQ HD SDI & HD HD HD × HD-Y × ×
HDMI
SD SDI & SD SD SD × Composite Composite ×
HDMI i
SD HDMI i & × SD DVCAM Composite Composite DVCAM
DVCAM
SD HDMI P × SD-P × × × ×
Off × × × Composite Composite ×
HD/SP HD SDI & HD HD HD × HD-Y × ×
HDMI
SD SDI & SD SD SD × Composite Composite ×
HDMI i
HD HDMI & × HD HDV HD-Y × HDV
HDV
Appendices
SD HDMI i & × SD HDV Composite Composite HDV
HDV
SD HDMI P & × SD-P HDV × × HDV
HDV
SD HDMI i & × SD DVCAM Composite Composite DVCAM
DVCAM
Off × × × Composite Composite ×
UDF/exFAT SD SD SDI & SD SD SD × Composite Composite ×
HDMI i
Off × × × Composite Composite ×
FAT SD SDI & SD SD SD × Composite Composite ×
HDMI i
SD HDMI i & × SD DVCAM Composite Composite DVCAM
DVCAM
Off × × × Composite Composite ×

1) When “Format” in “System” and the format of the played clip are 1920×1080/59.94P, 50P.
2) “×” (no signal) when “Format” in “System” is set to 1920×1080/59.94P, 50P.

Formats and Limitations of Outputs 133

 Video Format and the Recording Function
The compatible recording functions for each video format are listed as below.
When “Country” is set to “NTSC Area/NTSC(J) Area”
(a: compatible, –: not compatible).
System Normal Interval Frame Recording Clip Picture Slow & Proxy
Recording Recording Continuous Cache Quick Recording
HD/ F.Sys. Format SDI/HDMI/ SDI/HDMI/ Recording Recording Motion
SD i.LINK I/O Select i.LINK I/O Select
Other HDV or Other HDV or
than the DVCAM than the DVCAM
right right
HD422 50/1080/
59.94i
HQ 1920×1080/
a a – a – a a – a
59.94i
HQ 1440×1080/
59.94i
HD422 50/1080/
29.97P, 23.98P
HQ 1920×1080/
29.97P, 23.98P
UDF HD422 50/720/ MXF a a – a – a a a a
59.94P
HQ 1280×720/
59.94P
HQ 1440×1080/
a a – a – a a – a
29.97P, 23.98P
HD422 50/720/
a a – a – a a a –
29.97P, 23.98P
HQ 1280×720/
a – – – – a a – –
23.98P
XAVC-L50, L35
a a – a – a a – –
HD 1080/59.94P
XAVC-I 1080/
a a – a – a a1) – a
59.94i
XAVC-L50,
L35, L25 1080/ a a – a – a a – a
Appendices

59.94i
XAVC-I 1080/
29.97P, 23.98P
a a – a – a a1) a a
XAVC-I 720/
59.94P
exFAT XAVC-L50, L35 MXF
1080/29.97P
XAVC-L50, L35
a a – a – a a a a
1080/23.98P
XAVC-L50 720/
59.94P
HD422 50/1080/
59.94i
HQ 1920×1080/
a a – a – a a – a
59.94i
HQ 1440×1080/
59.94i

134 Formats and Limitations of Outputs

 System Normal Interval Frame Recording Clip Picture Slow & Proxy
Recording Recording Continuous Cache Quick Recording
HD/ F.Sys. Format SDI/HDMI/ SDI/HDMI/ Recording Recording Motion
SD i.LINK I/O Select i.LINK I/O Select
Other HDV or Other HDV or
than the DVCAM than the DVCAM
right right
HD422 50/1080/
29.97P, 23.98P
HQ 1920×1080/
29.97P, 23.98P
a a – a – a a a a
HD422 50/720/
59.94P
HQ 1280×720/
exFAT 59.94P MXF
HQ 1440×1080/
a a – a – a a – a
29.97P, 23.98P
HD422 50/720/
a a – a – a a a –
29.97P, 23.98P
HQ 1280×720/
a – – – – a a – –
23.98P
HQ 1920×1080/
59.94i
HQ 1440×1080/
HD a a – a – – a – a
59.94i, 29.97P
SP 1440×1080/
59.94i
HQ 1920×1080/
29.97P
a a – a – – a a a
HQ 1280×720/
59.94P
FAT HQ 1920×1080/ MP4
a a a a a – a a a
23.98P
HQ 1440×1080/
a a a a a – a – a
23.98P
SP 1440×1080/
a – – – – – a – –
23.98P
HQ 1280×720/
a a – a – – a a –
29.97P
Appendices
HQ 1280×720/
a a a a a – a a –
23.98P
IMX50 59.94i,
29.97P
UDF a a – a – a a – –
DVCAM 59.94i,
MXF
29.97P
SD
DVCAM 59.94i,
exFAT a a – a – a a – –
29.97P
DVCAM 59.94i,
FAT AVI a a – a – – a – –
29.97P

1) When XAVC-I is selected for “Format” in “System” of the OTHERS menu, the maximum picture cache time is 4
seconds.

Formats and Limitations of Outputs 135

 When “Country” is set to “PAL Area”
(a: compatible, –: not compatible).
System Normal Interval Frame Recording Clip Picture Slow & Proxy
Recording Recording Continuous Cache Quick Recording
HD/ F.Sys. Format SDI/HDMI/ SDI/HDMI/ Recording Recording Motion
SD i.LINK I/O Select i.LINK I/O Select
Other HDV or Other HDV or
than the DVCAM than the DVCAM
right right
HD422 50/1080/
50i
HQ 1920×1080/
a a – a – a a – a
50i
HQ 1440×1080/
50i
HD422 50/1080/
25P
HQ 1920×1080/
UDF 25P MXF
a a – a – a a a a
HD422 50/720/
50P
HQ 1280×720/
50P
HQ 1440×1080/
a a – a – a a – a
25P
HD422 50/720/
a a – a – a a a –
25P
XAVC-L50, L35
a a – a – a a – –
1080/50P
XAVC-I 1080/
50i
a a – a – a a1) – a

XAVC-L50,
L35, L25 1080/ a a – a – a a – a
HD 50i
XAVC-I 1080/
25P
XAVC-I 720/
a a – a – a a1) a a
50P
XAVC-L50, L35
Appendices

1080/25P
a a – a – a a a a
XAVC-L50 720/
50P
exFAT HD422 50/1080/ MXF
50i
HQ 1920×1080/
a a – a – a a – a
50i
HQ 1440×1080/
50i
HD422 50/1080/
25P
HQ 1920×1080/
25P
a a – a – a a a a
HD422 50/720/
50P
HQ 1280×720/
50P
HQ 1440×1080/
a a – a – a a – a
25P

136 Formats and Limitations of Outputs

 System Normal Interval Frame Recording Clip Picture Slow & Proxy
Recording Recording Continuous Cache Quick Recording
HD/ F.Sys. Format SDI/HDMI/ SDI/HDMI/ Recording Recording Motion
SD i.LINK I/O Select i.LINK I/O Select
Other HDV or Other HDV or
than the DVCAM than the DVCAM
right right
HD422 50/720/
exFAT MXF a a – a – a a a –
25P
HQ 1920×1080/
50i
HQ 1440×1080/
a a – a – – a – a
50i
SP 1440×1080/
50i
HD
HQ 1920×1080/
FAT MP4
25P
a a – a – – a a a
HQ 1280×720/
50P
HQ 1440×1080/
a a – a – – a – a
25P
HQ 1280×720/
a a – a – – a a –
25P
IMX50 50i, 25P
UDF DVCAM 50i, a a – a – a a – –
25P MXF
SD DVCAM 50i,
exFAT a a – a – a a – –
25P
DVCAM 50i,
FAT AVI a a – a – – a – –
25P

1) When XAVC-I is selected for “Format” in “System” of the OTHERS menu, the maximum picture cache time is 4
seconds.

Appendices

Formats and Limitations of Outputs 137

 Replacing the backup battery
Backup Battery
Notes
Replacement • Be sure to set the power switch to OFF when replacing
the backup battery.
• Be careful not to drop the removed screw into the
This camcorder uses a backup battery to retain camcorder.
various setting data.
A lithium battery (CR2032) for backup is 1 Remove the screw of the backup battery
mounted in the camcorder at the factory. holder (page 12), then remove the cover.
The backup battery retains the date, time, and Insert a nonmetalic item, such as a
timecode in Free Run mode even when no plastic toothpick, to the side of the
operating power is being supplied. battery and lever the battery out of its
compartment.
Service life of the backup battery
When the backup battery’s voltage falls, the
backup battery low-voltage warning appears on
the LCD monitor/EVF screen. CR20
25
3V
If this warning appears, replace the battery as
soon as possible.

WARNING
• Battery may explode if mistreated. Do not 2 Insert a new backup battery (CR2032)
recharge, disassemble, or dispose of in fire. with the + symbol on the battery facing
• Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat outside.
such as sunshine, fire or the like.

CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or CR20
3V
25

equivalent type recommended by the

manufacturer.
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey 3 Attach the cover in the original position.
the law in the relative area or country.
Appendices

25
CR20
3V

138 Backup Battery Replacement

Troubleshooting

Power

Symptoms Cause Remedy

The camcorder does not No battery pack is mounted and no Mount a battery pack (page 16) or connect to AC
power on when you set power is supplied to the DC IN power using the BC-U1 or BC-U2 (page 17).
the power switch to ON. connector.
The battery pack is completely Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one
exhausted. (page 16).
The power supply cuts The battery pack becomes exhausted. Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one
while operating. (page 16).
The battery pack becomes The ambient temperature is very low. This owes to the battery characteristics and is not a
exhausted very quickly. defect.
The battery pack is inadequately Recharge the battery pack (page 16).
charged. If the battery pack is soon exhausted even after you
charged it fully, it may comes to the end of its life.
Replace it with a new one.

Recording/Playback

Symptoms Cause Remedy

Recording does not start The power switch is set to OFF. Set the power switch to ON.
when you press the REC The SxS memory card is write- Release the write-protection, or replace the card with
START/STOP button. protected. a non-protected SxS memory card.
The SxS memory card is full. Replace the card with one having sufficient space.
The SxS memory card needs Restore the memory card (page 22).
restoration.
Playback does not start The power switch is set to OFF. Set the power switch to ON.
when you press the PLAY
Appendices
button.
The supplied IR Remote Remote control operation is disabled. Enable remote control operation (page 19).
Commander does not The battery of the IR Remote Replace the battery with a new one.
work. Commander is exhausted.
Audio recording is not The AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2 Adjust the audio recording levels with the AUDIO
possible. knobs are set to the minimum level. LEVEL CH-1/CH-2 knobs (page 35).
The recorded sound is The audio level is too high. Adjust the audio recording levels with the AUDIO
distorted. LEVEL CH-1/CH-2 knobs (page 35), and record
again.
The recorded sound has a The audio level is too low. Adjust the audio recording levels with the AUDIO
high noise level. LEVEL CH-1/CH-2 knobs (page 35), and record
again.

Troubleshooting 139
 External Devices

Symptoms Cause Remedy

The equipment connected It sometimes takes time for the Wait for about 15 seconds. If the connected
to the camcorder via an connected equipment to recognize equipment still does not react, do the following:
i.LINK connection does the operation. • Check the i.LINK cable, for example, by re-
not react as expected, for plugging it.
example, no picture • Turn the power off, and connect the cable again.
appears on its screen. • Change the i.LINK cable.

When Making a Wireless LAN Connection

Note
Obstructions and electromagnetic interference between the camcorder and wireless LAN access point or terminal device,
or the ambient environment (such as wall materials) could shorten the communication range or prevent connections
altogether. If you experience these problems, check the connection/communication status after moving the camcorder to
a new location, or bringing the camcorder and access point/terminal device closer together.

Symptoms Remedy
The terminal device cannot access to the • Check the connection settings of the terminal device such as the IP address
camcorder. setting, etc.
• The communication setting between the access point and client may be
invalid.
For details, refer to the operating instructions of the access point.
You cannot log in to the camcorder. Check the user name and password that you set.
The Web menu does not appear. • Check the IP address setting.
• Check that the port number (:8080) is added to the IP address.
The file uploading fails. The user name and password of the server may not be correct.
Input the correct user name and password.
Appendices

140 Troubleshooting
 Error/Warning Indications
The camcorder informs you of situations where warning, caution, or an operation check is required,
through messages on the LCD monitor/EVF screen, the tally lamps, and a buzzer.
The buzzer is output to the built-in speaker or to the headphones connected via the headphone connector.
The buzzer volume can be set with “Alarm Level” in “Audio Output” (page 92) of the AUDIO SET menu.

Error Indications
The camcorder stops operation after the following indications.
Error indication on Buzzer Tally Cause and measures
LCD/EVF lamps
E + Error code Continuous Rapidly The camcorder may be defective. Recording stops even if
flashing zREC is displayed on the LCD monitor/EVF screen.
Turn off the power and check the connected equipment, cables,
and media. If they are not defective, turn on the power again. If
the error persists, consult Sony service personnel.
(If power cannot be turned off by setting the power switch to
OFF, remove both the battery pack or the DC IN source.)

Warning Indications
When one of the following indications is generated, follow the message to clear the problem.
Warning indication Buzzer Tally Cause and measures
on LCD/EVF lamps
Media Near Full Intermittent Flashing Free space on the SxS memory card has become insufficient.
Replace it with another at the earliest opportunity.
Media Full Continuous Rapidly No space is left on the SxS memory card. Recording, clip
flashing copying and clip division cannot be performed.
Replace it with another.
SD Card Full Continuous Rapidly No space is left on the SD card. Recording cannot be
flashing performed. Appendices
Replace it with another.
Battery Near End Intermittent Flashing The battery power will be exhausted soon.
Charge the battery pack at the earliest opportunity.
Battery End Continuous Rapidly The battery pack is exhausted. Recording cannot be
flashing performed.
Stop operation and change the battery pack.
Temperature High Intermittent Flashing The internal temperature has risen above a safe operation
limit.
Suspend operation, turn off the power, and wait until the
temperature falls.
Voltage Low Intermittent Flashing The DC IN voltage has become low (stage 1).
Check the power supply.
Insufficient Voltage Continuous Rapidly The DC IN voltage is too low (stage 2). Recording cannot be
flashing performed.
Connect other power source.
HDD A1) Battery Near Intermittent Flashing The battery power of the connected HDD will be exhausted
End soon.
Change the battery at the earliest opportunity.

Error/Warning Indications 141

 Warning indication Buzzer Tally Cause and measures
on LCD/EVF lamps
HDD A1) Battery End Continuous Rapidly The battery of the connected HDD is exhausted. Recording
flashing cannot be performed.
Stop operation to change the battery.
Battery Error An error was detected with the battery pack.
Please Change Battery Replace the battery pack with a normal one.
Backup Battery End The remaining power of the backup battery is insufficient.
Please Change Replace the battery with a new one.
Unknown Media(A)2) A partitioned memory card or one that contains recorded clips
Please Change exceeding the number permitted with this camcorder is loaded.
This card cannot be used with this camcorder. Remove it and
load a compatible card.
Media Error An error occurred with the memory card. The card requires
Media(A)2) Needs to be restoration.
Restored Remove the card, load it again, and restore it.
Media Error Recording cannot be done, as the memory card is defective.
Cannot Record to As playback may be possible, it is recommended to replace it
Media(A)2) with another card after copying the clips, as required.
Media Error Neither recording nor playback can be done, as the memory
Cannot Use Media(A)2) card is defective.
It cannot be operated with this camcorder. Replace it with
another card.
Will Switch Slots Soon This is an advanced notice that the camcorder will switch from
the current memory card to the other memory card for
continuous recording.
No Clip There are no clips in the memory card.
Check the selected card.
Cannot Use Media(A)2) A card of a different file system or an unformatted card was
Unsupported File System inserted. It cannot be used with this camcorder.
Replace it with another card or format it with this camcorder.
In This File system A memory card incompatible with this file system is inserted.
Cannot Use Media(A)2) Replace the card from the respective slot, format it with the
camcorder, or change the “F.Sys.” setting.
Same File Already Exists A clip with the same name exists in the memory card to which
Change Media(A)2) you want to copy.
Replace the card from the respective slot with a different card.
Video Format Mismatch The external signal input via the i.LINK connection cannot be
Appendices

recorded, as the “Format” setting is different from the signal

format of the external input signal.
Change “Format” in “System” of the OTHERS menu to match
it to that of the external signal.
Copy Protected Input The external signal input via the i.LINK connection cannot be
Cannot Record recorded, as the stream is copy-protected.
Check the input signal.
Media Error An error occurred in reading data from the memory card, and
Playback Halted playback cannot be continued.
If this frequently occurs, change the memory card after
copying the clips, as required.
Media(A)2) Error Recording cannot be done, as an error occurred with the
memory card.
If this frequently occurs, change the memory card.

142 Error/Warning Indications

Warning indication Buzzer Tally Cause and measures
on LCD/EVF lamps
Media Reached The memory card comes to the end of its service life. Make a
Rewriting Limit backup copy and replace the card with another one as soon as
Change Media (A)2) possible. Recording/playback may not be performed properly
if you continue to use the card.
For details, refer to the operating instructions of the memory
card.
Reached Clip Number The maximum number of clips for 1 memory card is reached,
Limit so copying cannot continue. (xx/xx indicates the completed
Copy Completed to xx/xx copy operations.)
Replace the card.
Not Enough Capacity There is not enough capacity for copying. (xx/xx indicates the
Copy Completed to xx/xx completed copy operations.)
Replace the card.
Reached Duplication There are already 10 or more clips with the same name as the
Limit clip that you want to copy, so copying cannot continue. (xx/xx
Copy Completed to xx/xx indicates the completed copy operations.)
Replace the card.
Copy Error! There is no memory card inserted in the slot.
(CANCEL:Abort) Insert a card.
No Media!
Copy Error! The memory card is write-protected.
(CANCEL:Abort) Remove the card from the slot and remove the write-
Media Write Protected protection.
Copy Error! A memory card that cannot be used with the camcorder is
(CANCEL:Abort) inserted.
Cannot Use Media(A)2) Replace the card in the respective slot.
Copy General Files Copying of a general file failed.
NG: Cannot Copy Retry copying.
Unsupported File System A memory card with an different file system is inserted.
Replace the card, format it with the camcorder, or change the
“F.Sys.” setting.
Cannot Record to SD The SD card is write-protected.
Card Remove the card from the slot and remove the write-
NG: Media Write protection.
Protected
Cannot Record to SD The maximum number of clips for 1 SD card is reached, so Appendices
Card copying cannot continue.
Reached Clip Number Replace the card.
Limit
Cannot Record to SD The proxy recording function is being prepared. Wait a while.
Card
NG: Preparing

1) B for a HDD connected to slot B

2) (B) for the card in slot B

Error/Warning Indications 143

 http://www.mpegla.com

Licenses
Bitmap Fonts
MPEG-4 AVC Patent Portfolio This product uses RICOH Bitmap Fonts
produced and sold by Ricoh Company, Ltd.
License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR
THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL IMPORTANT:
USE OF A CONSUMER TO BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH CONTAINED IN THE CAMCORDER,
THE AVC STANDARD ( “AVC VIDEO”) PLEASE READ THIS END USER LICENSE
AND/OR AGREEMENT (“EULA”) CAREFULLY. BY
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ARE
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN ACCEPTING THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF
A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM EULA, YOU MAY NOT USE THE
A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO SOFTWARE.
PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE This EULA is a legal agreement between you and
IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. Sony Corporation (“SONY”). This EULA
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE governs your rights and obligations regarding the
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. software of SONY and/or its third party licensors
SEE <HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM> (including SONY’s affiliates) and their respective
affiliates (collectively, the “THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS”) contained in the camcorder,
MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio together with any updates/upgrades provided by
License SONY, any printed, on-line or other electronic
documentation for such software, and any data
ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN files created by operation of such software
CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY (collectively, the “SOFTWARE”).
MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE
MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING Notwithstanding the foregoing, any software in
VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED the SOFTWARE having a separate end user
Appendices

MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED license agreement (including, but not limited to,
WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER GNU General Public license and Lesser/Library
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2 General Public License) shall be covered by such
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS applicable separate end user license agreement in
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 lieu of the terms of this EULA to the extent
STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER, required by such separate end user license
COLORADO 80206. agreement (“EXCLUDED SOFTWARE”).
“PACKAGED MEDIA” means any storage
media storing MPEG-2 video information such as SOFTWARE LICENSE
DVD movie which are sold/distributed to general The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. The
consumers. Disc replicators or sellers of the SOFTWARE is protected by copyright and other
PACKAGED MEDIA need to obtain licenses for intellectual property laws and international
their own business from MPEG LA. Please treaties.
contact MPEG LA for any further information. COPYRIGHT
MPEG LA. L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET, All right and title in and to the SOFTWARE
SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206 (including, but not limited to, any images,

144 Licenses
photographs, animation, video, audio, music, text licenses approved as open source licenses by the
and “applets” incorporated into the SOFTWARE) Open Source Initiative or any substantially
is owned by SONY or one or more of the THIRD- similar licenses, including but not limited to any
PARTY SUPPLIERS. license that, as a condition of distribution of the
software licensed under such license, requires
GRANT OF LICENSE
SONY grants you a limited license to use the that the distributor make the software available in
SOFTWARE solely in connection with the source code format. If and to the extent disclosure
is required, please visit www.sony.com/linux or
camcorder and only for your individual use.
SONY and the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS other SONY-designated web site for a list of
expressly reserve all rights, title and interest applicable OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS
included in the SOFTWARE from time to time,
(including, but not limited to, all intellectual
property rights) in and to the SOFTWARE that and the applicable terms and conditions
this EULA does not specifically grant to you. governing its use. Such terms and conditions may
be changed by the applicable third party at any
REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS time without liability to you. To the extent
You may not copy, publish, adapt, redistribute, required by the licenses covering EXCLUDED
attempt to derive source code, modify, reverse SOFTWARE, the terms of such licenses will
engineer, decompile, or disassemble any of the apply in lieu of the terms of this EULA. To the
SOFTWARE, whether in whole or in part, or extent the terms of the licenses applicable to
create any derivative works from or of the EXCLUDED SOFTWARE prohibit any of the
SOFTWARE unless such derivative works are restrictions in this EULA with respect to such
intentionally facilitated by the SOFTWARE. You EXCLUDED SOFTWARE, such restrictions will
may not modify or tamper with any digital rights not apply to such EXCLUDED SOFTWARE. To
management functionality of the SOFTWARE. the extent the terms of the licenses applicable to
You may not bypass, modify, defeat or Open Source Components require SONY to make
circumvent any of the functions or protections of an offer to provide source code in connection with
the SOFTWARE or any mechanisms operatively the SOFTWARE, such offer is hereby made.
linked to the SOFTWARE. You may not separate
USE OF SOFTWARE WITH COPYRIGHTED
any individual component of the SOFTWARE
for use on more than one camcorder unless MATERIALS
expressly authorized to do so by SONY. You may The SOFTWARE may be capable of being used
by you to view, store, process and/or use content
not remove, alter, cover or deface any trademarks
or notices on the SOFTWARE. You may not created by you and/or third parties. Such content
share, distribute, rent, lease, sublicense, assign, may be protected by copyright, other intellectual
property laws, and/or agreements. You agree to
transfer or sell the SOFTWARE. The software,
network services or other products other than use the SOFTWARE only in compliance with all
SOFTWARE upon which the SOFTWARE’S such laws and agreements that apply to such Appendices
content. You acknowledge and agree that SONY
performance depends might be interrupted or
discontinued at the discretion of the suppliers may take appropriate measures to protect the
(software suppliers, service suppliers, or SONY). copyright of content stored, processed or used by
the SOFTWARE. Such measures include, but are
SONY and such suppliers do not warrant that the
SOFTWARE, network services, contents or other not limited to, counting the frequency of your
products will continue to be available, or will backup and restoration through certain
SOFTWARE features, refusal to accept your
operate without interruption or modification.
request to enable restoration of data, and
EXCLUDED SOFTWARE AND OPEN SOURCE termination of this EULA in the event of your
COMPONENTS illegitimate use of the SOFTWARE.
Notwithstanding the foregoing limited license
grant, you acknowledge that the SOFTWARE CONTENT SERVICE
PLEASE ALSO NOTE THAT THE
may include EXCLUDED SOFTWARE. Certain
EXCLUDED SOFTWARE may be covered by SOFTWARE MAY BE DESIGNED TO BE
open source software licenses (“Open Source USED WITH CONTENT AVAILABLE
THROUGH ONE OR MORE CONTENT
Components”), which means any software
SERVICES (“CONTENT SERVICE”). USE OF

Licenses 145
 THE SERVICE AND THAT CONTENT IS any express or implied warranty, duty or
SUBJECT TO THE TERMS OF SERVICE OF condition of fitness for HIGH RISK
THAT CONTENT SERVICE. IF YOU ACTIVITIES.
DECLINE TO ACCEPT THOSE TERMS,
EXCLUSION OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE
YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE
You acknowledge and agree that use of the
LIMITED. You acknowledge and agree that
SOFTWARE is at your sole risk and that you are
certain content and services available through the
responsible for use of the SOFTWARE. The
SOFTWARE may be provided by third parties
SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS,” without
over which SONY has no control. USE OF THE
warranty, duty or condition of any kind.
CONTENT SERVICE REQUIRES AN
INTERNET CONNECTION. THE CONTENT
SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY
SERVICE MAY BE DISCONTINUED AT ANY
SUPPLIERS (for purposes of this Section, SONY
TIME.
and each of the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS
INTERNET CONNECTIVITY AND THIRD PARTY shall be collectively referred to as “SONY”)
SERVICES EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL
You acknowledge and agree that access to certain WARRANTIES, DUTIES OR CONDITIONS,
SOFTWARE features may require an Internet EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
connection for which you are solely responsible. NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
Further, you are solely responsible for payment of WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
any third party fees associated with your Internet NONINFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR A
connection, including but not limited to Internet PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SONY DOES NOT
service provider or airtime charges. Operation of WARRANT OR MAKE ANY CONDITIONS
the SOFTWARE may be limited or restricted OR REPRESENTATIONS (A) THAT THE
depending on the capabilities, bandwidth or FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN ANY OF THE
technical limitations of your Internet connection SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR
and service. The provision, quality and security of REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THEY WILL BE
such Internet connectivity are the sole UPDATED, (B) THAT THE OPERATION OF
responsibility of the third party providing such ANY OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE
service. CORRECT OR ERROR-FREE OR THAT ANY
EXPORT AND OTHER REGULATIONS DEFECTS WILL BE CORRECTED, (C) THAT
THE SOFTWARE WILL NOT DAMAGE ANY
You agree to comply with all applicable export
and re-export restrictions and regulations of the OTHER SOFTWARE, HARDWARE OR
area or country in which you reside, and not to DATA, (D) THAT ANY SOFTWARE,
NETWORK SERVICES (INCLUDING THE
transfer, or authorize the transfer, of the
SOFTWARE to a prohibited country or otherwise INTERNET) OR PRODUCTS (OTHER THAN
THE SOFTWARE) UPON WHICH THE
Appendices

in violation of any such restrictions or

SOFTWARE’S PERFORMANCE DEPENDS
regulations.
WILL CONTINUE TO BE AVAILABLE,
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES UNINTERRUPTED OR UNMODIFIED, AND
The SOFTWARE is not fault-tolerant and is not (E) REGARDING THE USE OR THE
designed, manufactured or intended for use or RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE
resale as on-line control equipment in hazardous IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS,
environments requiring fail-safe performance, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR
such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, OTHERWISE.
aircraft navigation or communication systems, air
traffic control, direct life support machines, or NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR
weapons systems, in which the failure of the ADVICE GIVEN BY SONY OR AN
SOFTWARE could lead to death, personal injury, AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF SONY
or severe physical or environmental damage SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, DUTY OR
(“HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES”). SONY, each of CONDITION OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE
the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS, and each of THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. SHOULD
their respective affiliates specifically disclaim THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU

146 Licenses
ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL components; (3) configurations of your
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR camcorder, the SOFTWARE and the software
CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO applications, contents and peripheral devices that
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED interact with the camcorder and the
WARRANTIES, SO THESE EXCLUSIONS SOFTWARE; (4) use and frequency of use of the
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. functions of (x) the SOFTWARE, and (y) the
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY software applications, contents and peripheral
devices that interact with the SOFTWARE; and
SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS (for purposes of this Section, SONY (5) location data, as indicated below. SONY and
and each of the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS its affiliates, partners and agents may use and
disclose Information subject to applicable laws in
shall be collectively referred to as “SONY”)
SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY order to improve its products and services or to
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL provide products or services to you. Such uses
include, but are not limited to: (a) administering
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, BREACH OF the functionalities of the SOFTWARE; (b) to
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT improve, service, update or upgrade the
SOFTWARE; (c) improving, developing and
LIABILITY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL
THEORY RELATED TO THE SOFTWARE, enhancing the current and future products and
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY services of SONY and other parties; (d) to
provide you with information about the products
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF LOSS OF
PROFITS, LOSS OF REVENUE, LOSS OF and services offered by SONY and other parties;
DATA, LOSS OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE (e) complying with applicable laws or
regulations; and (f) to the extent offered,
OR ANY ASSOCIATED HARDWARE, DOWN
TIME AND USER’S TIME, EVEN IF ANY OF providing you with location-based services of
THEM HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE SONY and other parties, as indicated below. In
addition, SONY retains the right to use
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN ANY
CASE, EACH AND ALL OF THEIR Information to protect itself and third parties from
AGGREGATE LIABILITY UNDER ANY illegal, criminal or harmful conduct.
PROVISION OF THIS EULA SHALL BE
LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY Certain services available through the
PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. SOME SOFTWARE may rely upon location
information, including, but not limited to, the
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF geographic location of the camcorder. You
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL acknowledge that for the purpose of providing
such services, SONY, the THIRD-PARTY
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION
OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO SUPPLIERS or their partners may collect, Appendices
YOU. archive, process and use such location data, and
that such services are governed by the privacy
CONSENT TO USE OF NON-PERSONAL policies of SONY or such third party. By using
INFORMATION, LOCATION DATA, DATA any such services, you agree that you have
SECURITY reviewed the privacy policies applicable to such
You acknowledge and agree that SONY and its services and consent to such activities.
affiliates, partners and agents may read, collect,
transfer, process and store certain information SONY, its affiliates, partners and agents will not
collected from the SOFTWARE, including but intentionally use Information to personally
not limited to information about (i) the identify the owner or user of the SOFTWARE
SOFTWARE and (ii) the software applications, without your knowledge or consent. Any use of
contents and peripheral devices that interact with Information will be in accordance with the
your camcorder and the SOFTWARE privacy policies of SONY or such third party.
(“Information”). Information includes, but is not Please contact applicable contact address of each
limited to: (1) unique identifiers relating to your area or country for SONY’s current privacy
camcorder and its components; (2) performance policy.
of the camcorder, the SOFTWARE and their

Licenses 147
 the intent of this EULA, and the other parts will
Please contact applicable third parties for privacy remain in full force and effect.
policies relating to personally identifiable and
GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION
other information you provide when you use or
The United Nations Convention on Contracts for
access third party software or services.
the International Sale of Goods shall not apply to
this EULA. This EULA shall be governed by the
Information may be processed, stored or
laws of Japan, without regards to conflict of laws
transferred to SONY, its affiliates or agents which
provisions. Any dispute arising out of this EULA
are located in countries outside of your country of
shall be subject to the exclusive venue of the
residence. Data protection and information
Tokyo District Court in Japan, and the parties
privacy laws in certain countries may not offer the
hereby consent to the venue and jurisdiction of
same level of protection as your country of
such courts.
residence and you may have fewer legal rights in
relation to Information processed and stored in, or EQUITABLE REMEDIES
transferred to, such countries. SONY will use Notwithstanding anything contained in this
reasonable efforts to take appropriate technical EULA to the contrary, you acknowledge and
and organizational steps to prevent unauthorized agree that any violation of or non-compliance
access to or disclosure of Information, but does with this EULA by you will cause irreparable
not warrant it will eliminate all risk of misuse of harm to SONY, for which monetary damages
such Information. would be inadequate, and you consent to SONY
obtaining any injunctive or equitable relief that
AUTOMATIC UPDATE FEATURE
SONY deems necessary or appropriate in such
From time to time, SONY or the THIRD-PARTY
circumstances. SONY may also take any legal
SUPPLIERS may automatically update or
and technical remedies to prevent violation of
otherwise modify the SOFTWARE, including,
and/or to enforce this EULA, including, but not
but not limited to, for purposes of enhancement of
limited to, immediate termination of your use of
security functions, error correction and
the SOFTWARE, if SONY believes in its sole
improvement of functions, at such time as you
discretion that you are violating or intend to
interact with SONY’s or third parties’ servers, or
violate this EULA. These remedies are in addition
otherwise. Such updates or modifications may
to any other remedies SONY may have at law, in
delete or change the nature of features or other
equity or under contract.
aspects of the SOFTWARE, including, but not
limited to, functions you may rely upon. You TERMINATION
acknowledge and agree that such activities may Without prejudice to any of its other rights,
occur at SONY’s sole discretion and that SONY SONY may terminate this EULA if you fail to
may condition continued use of the SOFTWARE comply with any of its terms. In case of such
upon your complete installation or acceptance of termination, you must: (i) cease all use, and
Appendices

such update or modifications. Any updates/ destroy any copies, of the SOFTWARE; (ii)
modifications shall be deemed to be, and shall comply with the requirements in the section
constitute part of, the SOFTWARE for purposes below entitled “Your Account Responsibilities”.
of this EULA. By acceptance of this EULA, you AMENDMENT
consent to such update/modification. SONY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO AMEND
ENTIRE AGREEMENT, WAIVER, SEVERABILITY ANY OF THE TERMS OF THIS EULA AT ITS
This EULA and SONY’s privacy policy, each as SOLE DISCRETION BY POSTING NOTICE
amended and modified from time to time, ON A SONY DESIGNATED WEB SITE, BY
together constitute the entire agreement between EMAIL NOTIFICATION TO AN EMAIL
you and SONY with respect to the SOFTWARE. ADDRESS PROVIDED BY YOU, BY
The failure of SONY to exercise or enforce any PROVIDING NOTICE AS PART OF THE
right or provision of this EULA shall not PROCESS IN WHICH YOU OBTAIN
constitute a waiver of such right or provision. If UPGRADES/UPDATES OR BY ANY OTHER
any part of this EULA is held invalid, illegal, or LEGALLY RECOGNIZABLE FORM OF
unenforceable, that provision shall be enforced to NOTICE. If you do not agree to the amendment,
the maximum extent permissible so as to maintain you should promptly contact SONY for

148 Licenses
instructions. Your continued use of the * features or use of this software must
SOFTWARE after the effective date of any such * display the following
notice shall be deemed your agreement to be * acknowledgment:
bound by such amendment. * "This product includes software
* developed by the OpenSSL Project
THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARIES
Each THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER is an express * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
intended third-party beneficiary of, and shall have * (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
the right to enforce, each provision of this EULA
with respect to the SOFTWARE of such party. * 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and
* "OpenSSL Project" must not be used
* to endorse or promote products
Should you have any questions concerning this
EULA, you may contact SONY by writing to * derived from this software without
SONY at applicable contact address of each area * prior written permission. For written
* permission, please contact openssl-
or country.
* [email protected].
Copyright © 2012 Sony Corporation. *
* 5. Products derived from this software
* may not be called "OpenSSL" nor
About OpenSSL * may "OpenSSL" appear in their
* names without prior written
Because it uses the OpenSSL Toolkit, this * permission of the OpenSSL Project.
product uses software developed by the OpenSSL *
Project (http://www.openssl.org/). * 6. Redistributions of any form
* whatsoever must retain the following
OpenSSL License * acknowledgment:
--------------- * "This product includes software
* developed by the OpenSSL Project
/* * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
============================ * (http://www.openssl.org/)"
======= *
* Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
* Project. All rights reserved. * THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS''
* * AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
* Redistribution and use in source and * WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* binary forms, with or without * LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
* modification, are permitted provided * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY Appendices
* that the following conditions are met: * AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* * PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
* 1. Redistributions of source code must * EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL
* retain the above copyright notice, * PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE
* this list of conditions and the * LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
* following disclaimer. * INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
* * OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must * (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
* reproduce the above copyright * PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
* notice, this list of conditions and the * GOODS OR SERVICES;
* following disclaimer in the * LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
* documentation and/or other * OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* materials provided with the * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
* distribution. * THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
* * CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning * TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR

Licenses 149
 * OTHERWISE) * documentation (online or textual)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE * provided with the package.
* USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF *
* ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * Redistribution and use in source and
* SUCH DAMAGE. * binary forms, with or without
* * modification, are permitted provided
* that the following conditions are met:
============================ * 1. Redistributions of source code must
======= * retain the copyright notice, this list of
* * conditions and the following
* This product includes cryptographic * disclaimer.
* software written by Eric Young * 2. Redistributions in binary form must
* ([email protected]). This product * reproduce the above copyright
* includes software written by Tim * notice, this list of conditions and the
* Hudson ([email protected]). * following disclaimer in the
* * documentation and/or other
* / * materials provided with the
* distribution.
Original SSLeay License * 3. All advertising materials mentioning
----------------------- * features or use of this software must
* display the following
* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young * acknowledgement:
* ([email protected]) * "This product includes
* All rights reserved. * cryptographic software written by
* * Eric Young ([email protected])"
* This package is an SSL * The word 'cryptographic' can be left
* implementation written by Eric Young * out if the rouines from the library
* ([email protected]). * being used are not cryptographic
* The implementation was written so as * related :-).
* to conform with Netscapes SSL. * 4. If you include any Windows specific
* * code (or a derivative thereof) from
* This library is free for commercial and * the apps directory (application
* non-commercial use as long as the * code) you must include an
* following conditions are aheared to. * acknowledgement:
* The following conditions apply to all * "This product includes software
* code found in this distribution, be it the * written by Tim Hudson
Appendices

* RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not * ([email protected])"

* just the SSL code. The SSL *
* documentation included with this * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
* distribution is covered by the same * ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* copyright terms except that the holder * EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
* is Tim Hudson ([email protected]). * INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
* * THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and * MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
* as such any Copyright notices in the * FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
* code are not to be removed. * DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
* If this package is used in a product, * THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
* Eric Young should be given attribution * LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
* as the author of the parts of the library * INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
* used. * OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
* This can be in the form of a textual * (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
* message at program startup or in * PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE

150 Licenses
* GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
* DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
* INTERRUPTION) Specifications
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
* THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
* CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR General
* TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
* OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY Mass
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, Approx. 2.4 kg (5 lb 4.7 oz) (Camcorder
* EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE only)
* POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Approx. 2.8 kg (6 lb 2.8 oz) (With lens
*
hood (1), eyecup (1), battery pack BP-
* The licence and distribution terms for
U30 (1), SxS memory card (1))
* any publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be
Dimensions (W × H × D)
* changed. i.e. this code cannot simply
168 mm × 161 mm × 331 mm
* be copied and put under another
* distribution licence [including the GNU (6 5/8 × 6 3/8 × 13 1/8 inches)
* Public Licence.] (Not including extruding parts.)
* / The values for dimensions are
approximate.

Power Requirements
DC 12 V (11 V to 17 V)

Power Consumption
Approx. 18 W
(while recording with LCD Off, EVF
On, I/O Select Off, and Wireless
function Off)
Approx. 23 W
(while recording with LCD On, EVF
On, I/O Select HD-SDI, and Wireless
function On)

Inrush current Appendices

(1) Maximum possible inrush current at
initial switch-on (Voltage changes
caused by manual switching): 50 A
peak, 9.5 A r.m.s. (240V AC)
(2) Inrush current after a mains
interruption of five seconds (Voltage
changes caused at zero-crossing): 3 A
peak, 0.7 A r.m.s. (240V AC)

Operating Temperature
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)

Storage Temperature
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)

Specifications 151
 Battery Operation Time DVCAM mode: LPCM 16-bit, 48-kHz,
(While recording with LCD Off, EVF 4 channels
On, I/O Select Off, and Wireless UDF
function Off) MPEG HD422 mode: LPCM 24-bit,
With battery pack BP-U90: approx. 4.5 48-kHz, 4 channels
hours MPEG HD420 HQ mode: LPCM 16-bit,
With battery pack BP-U60/BP-U60T: 48-kHz, 4 channels
approx. 3 hours IMX50 mode: LPCM 24/16-bit,
With battery pack BP-U30: approx. 1.5 48-kHz, 4 channels
hours DVCAM mode: LPCM 16-bit, 48-kHz,
4 channels
Recording Format (Video)
FAT
XAVC Intra
MPEG HD420 HQ mode: LPCM 16-bit,
XAVC-I mode: CBG, 112 Mbps max,
48-kHz, 4 channels
MPEG-4 H.264/AVC
MPEG HD420 SP mode: LPCM 16-bit,
XAVC Long 48-kHz, 4 channels
XAVC-L 50 mode: VBR, 50 Mbps max, DVCAM mode: LPCM 16-bit, 48-kHz,
MPEG-4 H.264/AVC 2 channels
XAVC-L 35 mode: VBR, 35 Mbps max,
MPEG-4 H.264/AVC Recording Frame Rate
XAVC-L 25 mode: VBR, 25 Mbps max, exFAT
MPEG-4 H.264/AVC XAVC-I mode:
MPEG-2 Long GOP 1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P,
MPEG HD422 mode: CBR, 50 Mbps 23.98P, 25P
max, MPEG-2 422P@HL 1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P
MPEG HD420 HQ mode: VBR, 35 XAVC-L50 mode:
Mbps max, MPEG-2 MP@HL 1920 × 1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i,
MPEG HD420 SP mode: CBR, 25 Mbps 29.97P, 23.98P, 25P
max, MPEG-2 MP@H-14 1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P
XAVC-L35 mode:
MPEG IMX
1920 × 1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i,
IMX50 mode: CBR, 50 Mbps, MPEG-2
29.97P, 23.98P, 25P
422P@ML Intra
Appendices

XAVC-L25 mode:
DVCAM 1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i
DVCAM mode: CBR, 25 Mbps, MPEG HD422 mode:
DVCAM 1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P,
23.98P, 25P
Recording Format (Audio)
1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P,
exFAT 23.98P, 25P
XAVC-I mode: LPCM 24-bit, 48-kHz, MPEG HD420 HQ mode:
4 channels 1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P,
XAVC-L mode: LPCM 24-bit, 48-kHz, 23.98P, 25P
4 channels 1440 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P,
MPEG HD422 mode: LPCM 24-bit, 23.98P, 25P
48-kHz, 4 channels 1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P, 23.98P (2-3
MPEG HD420 HQ mode: LPCM 16-bit, Pull Down)
48-kHz, 4 channels

152 Specifications
 DVCAM mode: XAVC-L50 mode
720 × 480/59.94i, 29.97PsF When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
720 × 576/50i, 25PsF Approx. 240 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
UDF
(64 GB): Approx. 120 minutes
MPEG HD422 mode:
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P,
Approx. 60 minutes
23.98P, 25P
XAVC-L35 mode
1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P,
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
23.98P, 25P
Approx. 340 minutes
MPEG HD420 HQ mode:
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P,
(64 GB): Approx. 170 minutes
23.98P, 25P
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
1440 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P,
Approx. 85 minutes
23.98P, 25P
XAVC-L25 mode
1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P, 23.98P (2-3
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Pull Down)
Approx. 440 minutes
MPEG IMX50 mode:
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
720 × 486/59.94i, 29.97PsF
(64 GB): Approx. 220 minutes
720 × 576/50i, 25PsF
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
DVCAM mode:
Approx. 110 minutes
720 × 480/59.94i, 29.97PsF
MPEG HD422 mode
720 × 576/50i, 25PsF
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
FAT Approx. 240 minutes
MPEG HD420 HQ mode: When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, (64 GB): Approx. 120 minutes
23.98P, 25P When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
1440 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, Approx. 60 minutes
23.98P, 25P MPEG HD420 HQ mode
1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
23.98P, 25P Approx. 360 minutes
MPEG HD420 SP mode: When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
1440 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 23.98P (2-3 (64 GB): Approx. 180 minutes Appendices
Pull Down) When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
DVCAM mode: Approx. 90 minutes
720 × 480/59.94i, 29.97PsF DVCAM mode
720 × 576/50i, 25PsF When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 440 minutes
Recording/Playback Time
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
exFAT (64 GB): Approx. 220 minutes
XAVC-I mode When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
When using SBP-128B (128 GB): Approx. 110 minutes
Approx. 120 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A UDF
(64 GB): Approx. 60 minutes MPEG HD422 mode
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB): When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 30 minutes Approx. 240 minutes

Specifications 153
 When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A Note
(64 GB): Approx. 120 minutes These approximate playback times depend on operating
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB): conditions, available memory, etc.
Approx. 60 minutes
MPEG HD420 HQ mode
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Lens
Approx. 360 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
Lens Mount
(64 GB): Approx. 180 minutes Fixed type
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
Approx. 90 minutes Zoom Ratio
MPEG IMX50 mode 17× (optical), power/manual switchable
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 240 minutes Focal Length
f = 5.6 mm to 95.2 mm
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
(equivalent to 29.3 mm to 499 mm on a
(64 GB): Approx. 120 minutes
35 mm lens)
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
Approx. 60 minutes Iris
DVCAM mode Auto/manual switchable
When using SBP-128B (128 GB): F1.9 to F16 and C (close)
Approx. 440 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A Focus
(64 GB): Approx. 220 minutes AF/MF/Full MF switchable
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB): 800 mm to ∞ (macro OFF)
Approx. 110 minutes 50 mm to ∞ (macro ON, wide end)
800 mm to ∞ (macro ON, tele end)
FAT
MPEG HD420 HQ mode Image Stabilizer
When using SBP-128B (128 GB): ON/OFF possible, shift-lens system
Approx. 400 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A Filter Diameter
(64GB): Approx. 200 minutes M 77 mm, pitch 0.75 mm
When using SBS-32G1A (32GB):
Approx. 100 minutes
Appendices

MPEG HD420 SP mode

When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 560 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
(64GB): Approx. 280 minutes
When using SBS-32G1A (32GB):
Approx. 140 minutes
DVCAM mode
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 520 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
(64GB): Approx. 260 minutes
When using SBS-32G1A (32GB):
Approx. 130 minutes

154 Specifications
 Slow & Quick Motion Function
Camera Section
XAVC Intra, XAVC Long
Image Device (Type) 1080P: 1 to 30 and 60 fps in NTSC
1/2-inch triple chip “Exmor” Full HD setting, 1 to 25 and 50 fps in PAL
CMOS image sensor setting
720P: 1 to 60 fps in NTSC setting, 1 to
Effective Picture Elements 50 fps in PAL setting
1920 (H) × 1080 (V)
MPEG HD422
Optical System 1080P: 1 to 30 fps in NTSC setting, 1 to
F1.6 prism system 25 fps in PAL setting
720P: 1 to 60 fps in NTSC setting, 1 to
Built-in Optical Filters 50 fps in PAL setting
CLEAR: Clear
1: 1/8ND MPEG HD420 HQ
2: 1/64ND 1080P: 1 to 30 fps
720P: 1 to 60 fps
Sensitivity (2000 lx, 89.9% reflectance)
F12 (typical, 1920 × 1080/59.94i mode) White Balance
F13 (typical, 1920 × 1080/50i mode) Preset mode (3200K), Memory A mode,
Memory B mode/ATW mode
Minimum Illumination
0.09 lx (typical, 1920 × 1080/59.94i) Gain
0.07 lx (typical, 1920 × 1080/50i) –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18 dB, AGC
(F1.9, +18 dB gain, with 64-frame
Gamma Curve
accumulation, Gamma off, 100%
Selectable
video level)
0.02 lx (typical, 1920 × 1080/59.94i)
0.02 lx (typical, 1920 × 1080/50i)
(F1.9, +18 dB gain, with 64-frame Inputs/Outputs
accumulation, Gamma on, 50% video
level) Audio Input
XLR type 3-pin (2), female, LINE/MIC/
S/N Ratio MIC+48V switchable
58 dB (Y) (typical) LINE: +4 dBu
Appendices

MIC: –70 dBu to –30 dBu

Horizontal Resolution
1,000 TV lines or more (1920 × 1080i (Reference level 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
mode)
Composite Output
AV multi-connector (1), NTSC or PAL
Shutter Speed
1/32 sec. to 1/2,000 sec. (common with Audio Output)

Slow Shutter (SLS) Video Output

2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16, 32, and 64-frame BNC type (1), HD-Y/composite signal,
accumulation switchable with GENLOCK IN
connector
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω

Audio Output
AV multi-connector (1),

Specifications 155
 -10 dBu (Reference level), 47 kΩ
(common with Composite Output) Monitoring

SDI Output Viewfinder

BNC type (1), switchable with 3G/HD/ 0.45-inch color LCD: 852 (H) × 480 (V),
SD 16:9
SMPTE 292M/259M/424M/425M
standards Built-in LCD Monitor
3.5-inch color LCD monitor: 960 (H) ×
i.LINK 3 (RGB) × 540 (V), 16:9
IEEE 1394, 4-pin connector (1), HDV
(HDV 1080i) / DV input/output, S400

Timecode Input Built-in Microphone

BNC type (1), switchable with TC OUT
connector Built-in Microphone
0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 kΩ Omnidirectional stereo electret
condenser microphone
Timecode Output
BNC type (1), switchable with TC IN
connector
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω Media
Genlock Input Type
BNC type (1), switchable with VIDEO ExpressCard/34 slot (2)
OUT connector
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω

USB Supplied Accessories

USB device, mini-B (1)
Lens hood (1)
Headphone Output This is pre-installed to the camcorder.
Stereo minijack (1) EVF eyecup (1)
–18 dBu (Reference level output under This is pre-installed to the camcorder.
16 Ω load) Infrared Remote Commander (1)
USB wireless LAN module IFU-WLM3 (1)
Appendices

Speaker Output Accessory shoe kit (1)

Monaural, 250 mW BP-U30 battery pack (1)
Battery Charger/AC Adaptor: BC-U1 (1)
DC input Power cord (1)
DC jack (1) USB cable (1)
AV connecting cable (1)
Lens Remote
Shoulder strap (1)
8-pin round (1)
Lithium battery (CR2032 for backup) (1)
This is pre-installed to the camcorder.
HDMI Output
Type A (1) Lithium battery (CR2025 for the IR Remote
Commander) (1)
Option This is pre-installed to the IR Remote
4-pin (Type A) (1) Commander.
Warranty Booklet (1)
“Before Using this Unit” (1)
CD-ROM “Operating instructions” (1)

156 Specifications
 * To attach accessories to the rear accessory shoe,
Software Downloads use the cold shoe kit.
When the unit is used with a PC connection,
download any device drivers, plug-ins, and Design and specifications are subject to change
application software you require from the without notice.
following websites.
Notes
Sony Professional products website: • Always make a test recording, and verify that
U.S.A. http://pro.sony.com it was recorded successfully.
Canada http://www.sonybiz.ca SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
Latin America http://sonypro-latin.com DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING,
Europe http://www.pro.sony.eu/pro BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
Middle East, Africa COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT
http://sony-psmea.com ON ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS
Russia http://sony.ru/pro/ UNIT OR ITS RECORDING MEDIA,
Brazil http://sonypro.com.br EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS OR
Australia http://pro.sony.com.au ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE
New Zealand http://pro.sony.co.nz SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT OF
Japan http://www.sonybsc.com ANY TYPE.
Asia Pacific http://pro.sony-asia.com • Always verify that the unit is operating
Korea http://bp.sony.co.kr properly before use. SONY WILL NOT BE
China http://pro.sony.com.cn LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND
India http://pro.sony.co.in INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT
Sony Creative Software, software download ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF
page: PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS
http://www.sonycreativesoftware.com/ DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT,
download/software_for_sony_equipment EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY
PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF
THE WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER
Optional Accessories REASON WHATSOEVER.
• SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
Battery pack CLAIMS OF ANY KIND MADE BY
BP-U30, BP-U60, BP-U60T, BP-U90 USERS OF THIS UNIT OR MADE BY
Battery charger/AC adaptor THIRD PARTIES.
BC-U1, BC-U2 • SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE Appendices
SxS memory card LOSS, REPAIR, OR REPRODUCTION OF
SxS PRO Series ANY DATA RECORDED ON THE
SxS-1 Series INTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEM,
SxS memory card USB reader/writer RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL
SBAC-US20 STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER
Media Adaptor MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS.
QDA-EX1 (for XQD memory cards) • SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE
MEAD-SD02 (for SDHC cards) TERMINATION OR DISCONTINUATION
Electret condenser microphone OF ANY SERVICES RELATED TO THIS
ECM-VG1, ECM-673, ECM-674, UNIT THAT MAY RESULT DUE TO
ECM-678, ECM-MS2, ECM-680S CIRCUMSTANCES OF ANY KIND.
Wireless microphone
UWP-V1*, UWP-V2*
Memory recording unit
HVR-MRC1K*

Specifications 157
 built-in stereo microphones 34
Button/Remote Status Screen 80
Index
C
Numerics Camera Data 101
23.98P Output 94 CAMERA SET Menu 84
3G SDI OUT Level A/B 94 CAMERA Status Screen 78
Charge Count 80
A Clip 27, 70, 106, 112
A/V OUT connector 112 Clip Cont. Rec 39, 87
AC Adaptor 16 Clip Name Disp 108
AC Power 17 Clip name 27
Accessory shoe 9 Clip Operation menu 71
Accessory shoe plate 9 Clock 18
AGC mode 30 Clock Set 101
All Reset 101 CMOS Image Sensors 120
All-Clip thumbnail screen 69 Color Bars 85
Aperture 48 Color Correction 45
Area Detection 49 Color Detection 49
assignable buttons 37, 103 Copy 49
ATW 29 Copy All 107
ATW Speed 89 Country 105
Audio Input 91 Cueing up 71
AUDIO LEVEL knobs 35
audio monitoring 35 D
Audio Output 92 DC IN connector 17
audio recording levels 35 DC IN Power 17
AUDIO SELECT switches 35 delete shot marks 77
AUDIO SET Menu 91 Deleting Clips 50
AUDIO Status 79 Depth-of-Field indication 14
Auto FB Adjust 41, 90 Detail 46
Auto Naming 27 Direct Menu 15, 104
Auto Shutter 31 DISP CLIP INFO 73
Auto White Balance 30 Display On/Off 97
Auto-Tracing White balance 29 Down Converter 94
DURATION/TC/U-BIT button 34
B
backlight 18 E
Appendices

backup battery 138 Electronic Shutter 31

Battery Alarm 104 Electronic Viewfinder 18
Battery Charger 16 Entering a character string 83
Battery INFO 104 Error Indications 141
Battery Pack 16 EVF 18, 96
Battery/Media Status Screen 80 EX SLS 31
Black 49 EXPAND (COARSE) 76
Black Gamma 49 EXPAND (FINE) 76
built-in speaker 71 EXPAND CLIP Screen 72, 75

158 Index
Exposure 31 J
ExpressCard slot 112 Jog dial 82
External Input Signals 115
External Monitors 111 K
External Synchronization 116
Knee 48
eyepiece focusing knob 19
KP Flag 36

F L
F.Sys. 105
Language 102
Fan Control 109
LCD 18, 96
Flange focal length 41
LCD/VF SET Menu 96
Flicker Reduce 33, 85
Lens hood 7
Flickers 33
LENS REMOTE connector 32
Focus 32
Limitations of Inputs/Outputs 133
FOCUS MAG button 32
Low Key SAT 49
Format 23, 105
Format Media 107
Frame Recording 38, 86
M
FULL AUTO button 26 Macro mode 33
Full Auto mode 26 Marker 30, 97
Full MF mode 32 Matrix 44
MEAD-SD01 23
Media Adaptor 23
G Media Full 22
Gain 30
Media Near Full 22
Gain Setup 84
Memory A mode 29
Gamma 48
Memory B mode 29
Genlock 104
MENU button 82
GENLOCK IN connector 116
Menu Scroll 110
MF Assist 85
H microphone holder 34
handle ZOOM button 32 Monitoring audio 35
HD Detail 46 Multi Matrix 45
HD/SD 105
HDMI OUT connector 111 N
headphone connector 35
Network 109
Histogram indication 14
NG Flag 36
Hours Meter 104
Nonlinear Editing 115
Appendices

I O
i.LINK 13, 114
OK Flag 36
i.LINK connector 112
OK Mark 36
Image Alignment 41
OK-Clip thumbnail screen 69
Image Inversion 90
OTHERS Menu 101
Input Source Select 93
Output Signal 125
Interval Recording 37, 86
IR Remote 12, 104

Index 159
 P Steady Shot 33
P.Cache Rec 87 SxS Device Driver Software 112
PAUSE 76, 77 SxS Memory Cards 20
Peaking 32, 96 System 105
Picture Cache Recording 39
Picture Profiles 42 T
Plan.Metadata 51, 108 Tally 103
Planning metadata 51 TC Format 100
PLAY/PAUSE button 70 TC IN connector 117
Power Zoom 32 TC Out 118
PP Data 49 TC OUT connector 118
Preset mode 29 TC/UB SET Menu 99
Preventing switching errors 27 THUMBNAIL button 69
Profile Name 44 Thumbnail Screens 68, 71
Proxy File 109 time and date 18
Time Data 34
R Time Zone 18, 101
REC HOLD lever 27 Timecode 34, 99, 116
Rec Review 37, 89 TLCS 26, 89
REC REVIEW button 27 Trigger Mode 104, 114
REC START/STOP button 27
Recording audio signals 34 U
recording start mark 39, 72 USB cable 112
Reference Tone 36 USB Flash Drives 24
Reset 49 USB wireless LAN module 55
Users Bit 34, 99
S UTC 18
S&Q Motion 41, 87
SD Detail 47 V
SDHC Cards 23 Version 109
SDI OUT connector 111 Version Up 110
SDI Rec Control 95, 111 Video Formats 28
SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select 93 VIDEO OUT connector 111
SEL/SET buttons 82 VIDEO SET Menu 93
SEL/SET dial 82 Video Status Screen 79
Setting Data 50 Viewfinder 18
Setup Menus 81, 84 VOLUME buttons 71
Shockless White 89
Appendices

SHOT MARK 36, 72 W

SHOT MARK Screen 72, 76 Warning Indications 141
shot marks 36, 71, 77 White 46
Shutter 84 WHITE BAL button 30
Skin Tone Detail 47 WHITE BAL switch 29
SLOT SELECT button 69 White Balance 29
Slow & Quick Motion 40 White Switch <B> 89
SLS/EX SLS 85 Wi-Fi remote commander 61
Status Screens 78

160 Index
X
XAVC/MPEG2 105
XQD Memory Cards 23

Z
Zebra 30, 97
zebra pattern 30
Zoom 32, 86
Zoom Speed 32, 86
Zoom Transition 86

Appendices

Index 161